Control Units and additional system ___________________

Preface

components Fundamental safety

___________________
instructions 1

2
___________________
System overview
SINAMICS Control Units and operating
___________________
elements 3
S120
Control Units and additional system ___________________
Option boards 4
components
___________________
Terminal Modules 5
Manual
___________________
Hub Modules 6
Voltage Sensing Module
___________________
VSM10 7

___________________
Encoder system connection 8
Cabinet design and
___________
9
electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC)

___________________
Appendix A

(GH1), 04/2014
6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG Order number: 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 Copyright © Siemens AG 2004 - 2014.

Industry Sector Ⓟ 04/2014 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

SINAMICS documentation
The SINAMICS documentation is organized in the following categories:
● General documentation/catalogs
● User documentation
● Manufacturer/service documentation

Additional information
The following link provides information on the topics:
● Ordering documentation/overview of documentation
● Additional links to download documents
● Using documentation online (find and search in manuals/information)
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol/docu
Please send any questions about the technical documentation (e.g. suggestions for
improvement, corrections) to the following e-mail address:
docu.motioncontrol@siemens.com

My Documentation Manager
Under the following link there is information on how to create your own individual
documentation based on Siemens' content, and adapt it for your own machine
documentation:
http://www.siemens.com/mdm

Training
Information about SITRAIN (Siemens training on products, systems and solutions for
automation and drives) is available under the following link:
http://www.siemens.com/sitrain

FAQs
You can find Frequently Asked Questions on the Service&Support pages under Product
Support.
http://support.automation.siemens.com

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 5
Preface

SINAMICS
You can find information on SINAMICS at:
http://www.siemens.com/sinamics.

Usage phases and their documents/tools (as an example)

Table 1 Usage phases and the available documents/tools

Usage phase Document/tool

Orientation SINAMICS S Sales Documentation
Planning/configuration • SIZER Engineering Tool
• Configuration Manuals, Motors
Deciding/ordering SINAMICS S120 catalogs
• SIMOTION, SINAMICS S120 and Motors for Production
Machines (Catalog PM 21)
• SINAMICS and Motors for Single-axis Drives (Catalog D 31)
• SINUMERIK & SINAMICS
Equipment for Machine Tools (Catalog NC 61)
• SINUMERIK 840D sl Type 1B
Equipment for Machine Tools (Catalog NC 62)
Installation/assembly • SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual for Control Units and
Additional System Components
• SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual for Booksize Power
Units
• SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual for Chassis Power Units
• SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual for AC Drives
• SINAMICS S120M Equipment Manual Distributed Drive
Technology
• SINAMICS HLA System Manual Hydraulic Drive
Commissioning • STARTER Commissioning Tool
• SINAMICS S120 Getting Started
• SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
• SINAMICS S120 CANopen Commissioning Manual
• SINAMICS S120 Function Manual
• SINAMICS S120 Safety Integrated Function Manual
• SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual
• SINAMICS HLA System Manual Hydraulic Drive
Usage/operation • SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
• SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual
• SINAMICS HLA System Manual Hydraulic Drive

Control Units and additional system components

6 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Preface

Usage phase Document/tool

Maintenance/servicing • SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
• SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual
References • SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual

Target group
This documentation is intended for machine manufacturers, commissioning engineers, and
service personnel who use the SINAMICS drive system.

Benefits
This manual describes all the information, procedures and operational instructions required
for commissioning and servicing SINAMICS S120.

Standard scope
The scope of the functionality described in this document can differ from that of the drive
system that is actually supplied.
● It may be possible for other functions not described in this documentation to be executed
in the drive system. However, no claim can be made regarding the availability of these
functions when the equipment is first supplied or in the event of servicing.
● Functions that are not available in a particular product version of the drive system may be
described in the documentation. The functionality of the supplied drive system should
only be taken from the ordering documentation.
● Extensions or changes made by the machine manufacturer must be documented by the
machine manufacturer.
For reasons of clarity, this documentation does not contain all of the detailed information on
all of the product types, and cannot take into consideration every conceivable type of
installation, operation and service/maintenance.

Technical Support
Country-specific telephone numbers for technical support are provided on the Internet at
Contact:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support

EC Declaration of Conformity
The EC Declarations of Conformity for the machinery directive can be found on the Internet
at:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/21901735/67385845
Alternatively, you can contact the Siemens office in your region in order to obtain the EC
Declaration of Conformity.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 7
Preface

The EC Declaration of Conformity for the Low Voltage Directive can be found on the Internet
at:
http://support.automation.siemens.com
There – as a search term – enter the number 22383669 .

EMC limit values in South Korea

The EMC limit values to be complied with for South Korea correspond to the limit values of
the EMC product standard for variable-speed electric drives EN 61800-3, Category C2 or
limit value class A, Group 1 according to EN55011. By applying suitable supplementary
measures, the limit values according to Category C2 or according to limit value class A,
Group 1 are maintained. Further, additional measures may be required, for instance, using
an additional radio interference suppression filter (EMC filter).
The measures for EMC-compliant design of the system are described in detail in this manual
respectively in the Configuration Manual EMC Installation Guideline.
Please note that the final statement regarding compliance with the standard is given by the
respective label attached to the individual unit.

Spare parts
Spare parts are available on the Internet at:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/16612315

Test certificates
Test certificates for functions of functional safety ("Safety Integrated") can be found at:
http://support.automation.siemens.com
An up-to-date list of already certified components is also available on request from your local
Siemens office. If you have any questions relating to certifications that have not yet been
completed, please ask your Siemens contact.

Control Units and additional system components

8 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Preface

Grounding symbols

Table 2 Symbols

Symbol Meaning

Connection for protective conductor (PE)

Ground (e.g. M 24 V)

Connection for function potential bonding

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 9
Preface

Control Units and additional system components

10 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 5
1 Fundamental safety instructions ............................................................................................................ 19
1.1 General safety instructions ..........................................................................................................19
1.2 Safety instructions for electromagnetic fields (EMF) ...................................................................22
1.3 Handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) ...........................................................................23
1.4 Industrial security .........................................................................................................................23
1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems .........................................................................................24
2 System overview ................................................................................................................................... 27
2.1 Field of application .......................................................................................................................27
2.2 Platform Concept and Totally Integrated Automation ..................................................................28
2.3 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................30
2.4 SINAMICS S120 components......................................................................................................32
2.5 Power units ..................................................................................................................................34
2.6 System data .................................................................................................................................34
2.7 Recycling and disposal ................................................................................................................36
3 Control Units and operating elements .................................................................................................... 37
3.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................37
3.2 Safety instructions for Control Units ............................................................................................41
3.3 Control Unit CU320-2 PN (PROFINET) .......................................................................................43
3.3.1 Description ...................................................................................................................................43
3.3.2 Interface description .....................................................................................................................44
3.3.2.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................44
3.3.2.2 X100-X103 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces .............................................................................................47
3.3.2.3 X122 digital inputs/outputs ...........................................................................................................48
3.3.2.4 X132 digital inputs/outputs ...........................................................................................................50
3.3.2.5 X124 electronics power supply ....................................................................................................52
3.3.2.6 X127 LAN (Ethernet) ....................................................................................................................53
3.3.2.7 X140 serial interface (RS232) ......................................................................................................54
3.3.2.8 X150 P1/P2 PROFINET ...............................................................................................................55
3.3.2.9 Measuring socket contacts ..........................................................................................................56
3.3.2.10 DIAG button .................................................................................................................................56
3.3.2.11 Slot for memory card ....................................................................................................................57
3.3.3 Connection example ....................................................................................................................59
3.3.4 Meaning of the LEDs ...................................................................................................................60
3.3.4.1 Description of the LED statuses...................................................................................................60
3.3.4.2 Behavior of the LEDs during booting ...........................................................................................60
3.3.4.3 Behavior of the LEDs in the operating state ................................................................................61

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 11
Table of contents

3.3.5 Dimension drawing ...................................................................................................................... 63

3.3.6 Technical data ............................................................................................................................. 64
3.4 Control Unit CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS) ...................................................................................... 65
3.4.1 Description .................................................................................................................................. 65
3.4.2 Interface description .................................................................................................................... 66
3.4.2.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 66
3.4.2.2 X100-X103 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces ............................................................................................ 69
3.4.2.3 X122 digital inputs/outputs .......................................................................................................... 70
3.4.2.4 X132 digital inputs/outputs .......................................................................................................... 72
3.4.2.5 X124 electronics power supply ................................................................................................... 74
3.4.2.6 X126 PROFIBUS ........................................................................................................................ 75
3.4.2.7 PROFIBUS address switch ......................................................................................................... 76
3.4.2.8 X127 LAN (Ethernet) ................................................................................................................... 77
3.4.2.9 X140 serial interface (RS232) ..................................................................................................... 78
3.4.2.10 Measuring socket contacts.......................................................................................................... 78
3.4.2.11 DIAG button ................................................................................................................................ 79
3.4.2.12 Slot for memory card ................................................................................................................... 79
3.4.3 Connection example ................................................................................................................... 81
3.4.4 Meaning of the LEDs ................................................................................................................... 82
3.4.4.1 Description of the LED statuses .................................................................................................. 82
3.4.4.2 Behavior of the LEDs during booting .......................................................................................... 82
3.4.4.3 Behavior of the LEDs in the operating state ............................................................................... 83
3.4.5 Dimension drawing ...................................................................................................................... 85
3.4.6 Technical data ............................................................................................................................. 86
3.5 Mounting Control Units ................................................................................................................ 87
3.5.1 Mounting to a Line Module .......................................................................................................... 87
3.5.2 Mounting on the mounting surface .............................................................................................. 89
3.5.3 Opening and removing the cover ................................................................................................ 90
3.6 Basic Operator Panel BOP20 ..................................................................................................... 91
3.6.1 Description .................................................................................................................................. 91
3.6.2 Interface description .................................................................................................................... 91
3.6.3 Mounting at the Control Unit ....................................................................................................... 94
3.6.4 Removal ...................................................................................................................................... 95
4 Option boards ....................................................................................................................................... 97
4.1 Safety instructions for option boards ........................................................................................... 97
4.2 CAN Communication Board CBC10 ........................................................................................... 98
4.2.1 Description .................................................................................................................................. 98
4.2.2 Interface description .................................................................................................................... 98
4.2.2.1 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 98
4.2.2.2 X451 CAN bus interface.............................................................................................................. 99
4.2.2.3 X452 CAN bus interface X452 .................................................................................................. 100
4.2.2.4 2-pin SMD DIL switch ................................................................................................................ 100
4.2.3 Meaning of the LED .................................................................................................................. 101
4.2.4 Installation ................................................................................................................................. 102
4.2.5 Technical data ........................................................................................................................... 102
4.3 Communication Board Ethernet CBE20 ................................................................................... 103
4.3.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 103
4.3.2 Interface description .................................................................................................................. 103
4.3.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 103

Control Units and additional system components

12 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Table of contents

4.3.2.2 X1400 Ethernet interface ...........................................................................................................104

4.3.3 Meaning of the LEDs .................................................................................................................105
4.3.4 Installation ..................................................................................................................................107
4.3.5 Technical data ............................................................................................................................107
4.4 Communication Board Ethernet CBE25 ....................................................................................108
4.4.1 Description .................................................................................................................................108
4.4.2 Interface description ...................................................................................................................109
4.4.2.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................109
4.4.2.2 Ethernet interface .......................................................................................................................109
4.4.3 Meaning of the LEDs .................................................................................................................111
4.4.4 Installation ..................................................................................................................................113
4.4.5 Technical data ............................................................................................................................114
4.5 Terminal Board TB30 .................................................................................................................115
4.5.1 Description .................................................................................................................................115
4.5.2 Interface description ...................................................................................................................115
4.5.2.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................115
4.5.2.2 X424 power supply, digital outputs ............................................................................................116
4.5.2.3 X481 digital inputs/outputs .........................................................................................................117
4.5.2.4 X482 analog inputs/outputs .......................................................................................................118
4.5.3 Connection example ..................................................................................................................119
4.5.4 Installation ..................................................................................................................................120
4.5.5 Shield support ............................................................................................................................121
4.5.6 Technical data ............................................................................................................................121
5 Terminal Modules ............................................................................................................................... 123
5.1 Safety instructions for Terminal Modules ...................................................................................123
5.2 Terminal Module TM15 ..............................................................................................................125
5.2.1 Description .................................................................................................................................125
5.2.2 Interface description ...................................................................................................................126
5.2.2.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................126
5.2.2.2 X500/X501 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces ...........................................................................................127
5.2.2.3 X520 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs ....................................................................................127
5.2.2.4 X521 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs ....................................................................................128
5.2.2.5 X522 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs ....................................................................................129
5.2.2.6 X524 Electronics power supply ..................................................................................................129
5.2.3 Connection example ..................................................................................................................130
5.2.4 Meaning of the LED ...................................................................................................................131
5.2.5 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................132
5.2.6 Installation ..................................................................................................................................133
5.2.7 Protective conductor connection and shield support .................................................................134
5.2.8 Connector coding .......................................................................................................................135
5.2.9 Technical data ............................................................................................................................136
5.3 Terminal Module TM31 ..............................................................................................................138
5.3.1 Description .................................................................................................................................138
5.3.2 Interface description ...................................................................................................................139
5.3.2.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................139
5.3.2.2 X500/X501 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces ...........................................................................................140
5.3.2.3 X520 digital inputs ......................................................................................................................140
5.3.2.4 X521 analog inputs ....................................................................................................................142
5.3.2.5 S5 current/voltage changeover switch for analog inputs ...........................................................143

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 13
Table of contents

5.3.2.6 X522 analog outputs/temperature sensor ................................................................................. 143

5.3.2.7 X524 Electronics power supply ................................................................................................. 144
5.3.2.8 X530 digital inputs ..................................................................................................................... 145
5.3.2.9 X540 auxiliary voltage for the digital inputs ............................................................................... 146
5.3.2.10 X541 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs .................................................................................... 147
5.3.2.11 X542 relay outputs .................................................................................................................... 148
5.3.3 Connection example ................................................................................................................. 149
5.3.4 Meaning of the LED .................................................................................................................. 150
5.3.5 Dimension drawing .................................................................................................................... 151
5.3.6 Installation ................................................................................................................................. 152
5.3.7 Protective conductor connection and shield support ................................................................ 153
5.3.8 Connector coding ...................................................................................................................... 154
5.3.9 Technical data ........................................................................................................................... 155
5.4 Terminal Module TM41 ............................................................................................................. 156
5.4.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 156
5.4.2 Interface description .................................................................................................................. 157
5.4.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 157
5.4.2.2 X500/X501 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces .......................................................................................... 158
5.4.2.3 X514 and X524 Power supply ................................................................................................... 158
5.4.2.4 X520 encoder interface ............................................................................................................. 159
5.4.2.5 X521 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs .................................................................................... 160
5.4.2.6 X522 isolated digital inputs ....................................................................................................... 161
5.4.2.7 X523 analog input ..................................................................................................................... 162
5.4.3 Connection example ................................................................................................................. 163
5.4.4 Meaning of the LEDs ................................................................................................................. 164
5.4.5 Dimension drawing .................................................................................................................... 165
5.4.6 Installation ................................................................................................................................. 166
5.4.7 Protective conductor connection and shield support ................................................................ 167
5.4.8 Technical data ........................................................................................................................... 168
5.5 Terminal Module TM54F ........................................................................................................... 169
5.5.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 169
5.5.2 Interface description .................................................................................................................. 170
5.5.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 170
5.5.2.2 X500/X501 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces .......................................................................................... 171
5.5.2.3 X514 power supply for digital outputs and sensors .................................................................. 171
5.5.2.4 X520 sensor power supply ........................................................................................................ 172
5.5.2.5 X521 fail-safe digital inputs + power supply with forced dormant error detection .................... 172
5.5.2.6 X522 fail-safe digital inputs ....................................................................................................... 173
5.5.2.7 X523 fail-safe digital output ....................................................................................................... 174
5.5.2.8 X524 electronics power supply ................................................................................................. 175
5.5.2.9 X525 fail-safe digital output ....................................................................................................... 176
5.5.2.10 X531 fail-safe digital inputs + power supply with forced dormant error detection .................... 177
5.5.2.11 X532 fail-safe digital inputs ....................................................................................................... 178
5.5.2.12 X533 fail-safe digital output ....................................................................................................... 179
5.5.2.13 X535 fail-safe digital output ....................................................................................................... 180
5.5.3 Connection example ................................................................................................................. 181
5.5.4 Meaning of the LEDs ................................................................................................................. 182
5.5.5 Dimension drawing .................................................................................................................... 184
5.5.6 Installation ................................................................................................................................. 185
5.5.7 Protective conductor connection and shield support ................................................................ 186
5.5.8 Technical data ........................................................................................................................... 187

Control Units and additional system components

14 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Table of contents

5.6 Terminal Module TM120 ............................................................................................................188

5.6.1 Description .................................................................................................................................188
5.6.2 Interface description ...................................................................................................................189
5.6.2.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................189
5.6.2.2 X500/X501 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces ...........................................................................................190
5.6.2.3 X521 temperature sensor input..................................................................................................191
5.6.2.4 X524 Electronics power supply ..................................................................................................193
5.6.3 Connection examples ................................................................................................................194
5.6.4 Meaning of the LED ...................................................................................................................196
5.6.5 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................197
5.6.6 Installation ..................................................................................................................................198
5.6.7 Protective conductor connection and shield support .................................................................199
5.6.8 Technical data ............................................................................................................................200
5.7 Terminal Module TM150 ............................................................................................................201
5.7.1 Description .................................................................................................................................201
5.7.2 Interface description ...................................................................................................................202
5.7.2.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................202
5.7.2.2 X500/X501 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces ...........................................................................................203
5.7.2.3 X524 Electronics power supply ..................................................................................................203
5.7.2.4 X531-X536 temperature sensor inputs ......................................................................................204
5.7.3 Connection examples ................................................................................................................206
5.7.4 Meaning of the LED ...................................................................................................................208
5.7.4.1 Terminal Module TM150 ............................................................................................................208
5.7.5 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................209
5.7.6 Installation ..................................................................................................................................210
5.7.7 Protective conductor connection and shield support .................................................................211
5.7.8 Technical data ............................................................................................................................212
6 Hub Modules....................................................................................................................................... 213
6.1 Safety instructions for Hub Modules ..........................................................................................213
6.2 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20 .............................................................................................214
6.2.1 Description .................................................................................................................................214
6.2.2 Interface description ...................................................................................................................215
6.2.2.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................215
6.2.2.2 X500-X505 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces ...........................................................................................216
6.2.2.3 X524 Electronics power supply ..................................................................................................217
6.2.3 Meaning of the LED ...................................................................................................................218
6.2.4 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................219
6.2.5 Installation ..................................................................................................................................220
6.2.6 Protective conductor connection and shield support .................................................................221
6.2.7 Technical data ............................................................................................................................221
6.3 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External DME20 ...............................................................................222
6.3.1 Description .................................................................................................................................222
6.3.2 Interface description ...................................................................................................................223
6.3.2.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................223
6.3.2.2 X500-X505 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces ...........................................................................................224
6.3.2.3 X524 Electronics power supply ..................................................................................................224
6.3.3 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................226
6.3.4 Installation ..................................................................................................................................227
6.3.5 Technical data ............................................................................................................................227
6.3.6 Specifications for use with UL approval .....................................................................................228

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 15
Table of contents

7 Voltage Sensing Module VSM10 ..........................................................................................................229

7.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 229
7.2 Safety instructions for the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM10) .................................................. 230
7.3 Interface description .................................................................................................................. 232
7.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 232
7.3.2 X500 DRIVE-CLiQ interface...................................................................................................... 234
7.3.3 X520 analog inputs/temperature sensor ................................................................................... 234
7.3.4 X521 three-phase voltage sensing up to 100 V 3-ph. AC......................................................... 236
7.3.5 X522 three-phase voltage sensing up to 690 V 3-ph. AC......................................................... 237
7.3.6 X524 Electronics power supply ................................................................................................. 238
7.3.7 X530 neutral point grounding .................................................................................................... 239
7.4 Connection example ................................................................................................................. 240
7.5 Meaning of the LED .................................................................................................................. 242
7.6 Dimension drawing .................................................................................................................... 243
7.7 Installation ................................................................................................................................. 244
7.8 Protective conductor connection and shield support ................................................................ 245
7.9 Operation on an isolated-neutral system (IT system) ............................................................... 246
7.10 Technical data ........................................................................................................................... 246
7.11 Service and maintenance.......................................................................................................... 247
8 Encoder system connection .................................................................................................................249
8.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................ 249
8.2 Overview of Sensor Modules .................................................................................................... 250
8.3 Safety instructions for Sensor Modules and encoders ............................................................. 252
8.4 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10 ................................................................................ 255
8.4.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 255
8.4.2 Interface description .................................................................................................................. 255
8.4.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 255
8.4.2.2 X500 DRIVE-CLiQ interface...................................................................................................... 256
8.4.2.3 X520 encoder system interface................................................................................................. 257
8.4.2.4 X524 Electronics power supply ................................................................................................. 258
8.4.3 Connection example ................................................................................................................. 259
8.4.4 Meaning of the LED .................................................................................................................. 259
8.4.5 Dimension drawing .................................................................................................................... 260
8.4.6 Mounting.................................................................................................................................... 261
8.4.7 Technical data ........................................................................................................................... 262
8.5 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC20 ................................................................................ 264
8.5.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 264
8.5.2 Interface description .................................................................................................................. 264
8.5.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 264
8.5.2.2 X500 DRIVE-CLiQ interface...................................................................................................... 265
8.5.2.3 X520 encoder system interface................................................................................................. 266
8.5.2.4 X524 Electronics power supply ................................................................................................. 267
8.5.3 Connection example ................................................................................................................. 268
8.5.4 Meaning of the LED .................................................................................................................. 268

Control Units and additional system components

16 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Table of contents

8.5.5 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................269

8.5.6 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................270
8.5.7 Technical data ............................................................................................................................271
8.6 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30 .................................................................................272
8.6.1 Description .................................................................................................................................272
8.6.2 Interface description ...................................................................................................................272
8.6.2.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................272
8.6.2.2 X500 DRIVE-CLiQ interface ......................................................................................................273
8.6.2.3 X520 encoder system interface .................................................................................................274
8.6.2.4 X521 / X531 alternative encoder system interface ....................................................................276
8.6.2.5 X524 Electronics power supply ..................................................................................................278
8.6.3 Connection examples ................................................................................................................279
8.6.4 Meaning of the LEDs .................................................................................................................281
8.6.5 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................282
8.6.6 Mounting ....................................................................................................................................283
8.6.7 Protective conductor connection and shield support .................................................................284
8.6.8 Technical data ............................................................................................................................285
8.7 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC40 .................................................................................290
8.7.1 Description .................................................................................................................................290
8.7.2 Interface descriptions .................................................................................................................291
8.7.2.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................291
8.7.2.2 X500/1 and X500/2 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces ..............................................................................292
8.7.2.3 X520/1 and X520/2 encoder system interfaces .........................................................................293
8.7.2.4 X524 Electronics power supply ..................................................................................................294
8.7.3 Connection example ..................................................................................................................295
8.7.4 Meaning of the LEDs .................................................................................................................296
8.7.5 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................297
8.7.6 Installation ..................................................................................................................................298
8.7.7 Technical data ............................................................................................................................299
8.8 Sensor Module External SME20 ................................................................................................300
8.8.1 Description .................................................................................................................................300
8.8.2 Interface description ...................................................................................................................300
8.8.2.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................300
8.8.2.2 DRIVE-CLiQ interface ................................................................................................................301
8.8.2.3 Encoder system interface ..........................................................................................................302
8.8.3 Connection example ..................................................................................................................303
8.8.4 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................304
8.8.5 Installation ..................................................................................................................................304
8.8.6 Technical data ............................................................................................................................305
8.9 Sensor Module External SME25 ................................................................................................307
8.9.1 Description .................................................................................................................................307
8.9.2 Interface description ...................................................................................................................307
8.9.2.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................307
8.9.2.2 DRIVE-CLiQ interface ................................................................................................................308
8.9.2.3 Encoder system interface ..........................................................................................................309
8.9.3 Connection example ..................................................................................................................309
8.9.4 Dimension drawing ....................................................................................................................310
8.9.5 Installation ..................................................................................................................................310
8.9.6 Technical data ............................................................................................................................311
8.10 Sensor Module External SME120 ..............................................................................................313

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 17
Table of contents

8.10.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 313

8.10.2 Safety instructions for Sensor Modules External ...................................................................... 313
8.10.3 Interface description .................................................................................................................. 314
8.10.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 314
8.10.3.2 X100 encoder system interface................................................................................................. 315
8.10.3.3 X200 thermistor sensor input .................................................................................................... 316
8.10.3.4 X300 hall sensor input............................................................................................................... 317
8.10.3.5 X500 DRIVE-CLiQ interface...................................................................................................... 317
8.10.4 Connection examples ................................................................................................................ 318
8.10.5 Dimension drawing .................................................................................................................... 323
8.10.6 Installation ................................................................................................................................. 323
8.10.7 Technical data ........................................................................................................................... 324
8.11 Sensor Module External SME125 ............................................................................................. 326
8.11.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 326
8.11.2 Safety instructions for Sensor Modules External ...................................................................... 326
8.11.3 Interface description .................................................................................................................. 327
8.11.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 327
8.11.3.2 X100 encoder system interface................................................................................................. 328
8.11.3.3 X200 thermistor sensor input .................................................................................................... 329
8.11.3.4 X500 DRIVE-CLiQ interface...................................................................................................... 330
8.11.4 Connection examples ................................................................................................................ 331
8.11.5 Dimension drawing .................................................................................................................... 336
8.11.6 Installation ................................................................................................................................. 336
8.11.7 Technical data ........................................................................................................................... 337
8.12 DRIVE-CLiQ encoder ................................................................................................................ 339
8.12.1 Description ................................................................................................................................ 339
8.12.2 Interface description .................................................................................................................. 339
8.12.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 339
8.12.2.2 DRIVE-CLiQ interface ............................................................................................................... 340
8.12.3 Dimension drawings .................................................................................................................. 340
8.12.4 Installation ................................................................................................................................. 342
8.12.5 Technical data ........................................................................................................................... 345
9 Cabinet design and electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) .....................................................................347
9.1 Tightening torques for screws and screw connections ............................................................. 347
9.2 Information on control cabinet installation and EMC ................................................................ 348
A Appendix .............................................................................................................................................349
A.1 List of abbreviations .................................................................................................................. 349
A.2 Documentation overview ........................................................................................................... 358
A.3 Terminal description .................................................................................................................. 359
A.3.1 Spring-loaded terminals ............................................................................................................ 359
A.3.2 Screw terminals ......................................................................................................................... 360
Index ...................................................................................................................................................363

Control Units and additional system components

18 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
Fundamental safety instructions 1
1.1 General safety instructions

DANGER
Danger to life due to live parts and other energy sources
Death or serious injury can result when live parts are touched.
• Only work on electrical devices when you are qualified for this job.
• Always observe the country-specific safety rules.
Generally, six steps apply when establishing safety:
1. Prepare for shutdown and notify all those who will be affected by the procedure.
2. Disconnect the machine from the supply.
– Switch off the machine.
– Wait until the discharge time specified on the warning labels has elapsed.
– Check that it really is in a no-voltage condition, from phase conductor to phase
conductor and phase conductor to protective conductor.
– Check whether the existing auxiliary supply circuits are de-energized.
– Ensure that the motors cannot move.
3. Identify all other dangerous energy sources, e.g. compressed air, hydraulic systems, or
water.
4. Isolate or neutralize all hazardous energy sources by closing switches, grounding or
short-circuiting or closing valves, for example.
5. Secure the energy sources against switching on again.
6. Ensure that the correct machine is completely interlocked.
After you have completed the work, restore the operational readiness in the inverse
sequence.

WARNING
Danger to life through a hazardous voltage when connecting an unsuitable power supply
Touching live components can result in death or severe injury.
• Only use power supplies that provide SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) or PELV-
(Protective Extra Low Voltage) output voltages for all connections and terminals of the
electronics modules.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 19
Fundamental safety instructions
1.1 General safety instructions

WARNING
Danger to life when live parts are touched on damaged devices
Improper handling of devices can cause damage.
For damaged devices, hazardous voltages can be present at the enclosure or at exposed
components; if touched, this can result in death or severe injury.
• Ensure compliance with the limit values specified in the technical data during transport,
storage and operation.
• Do not use any damaged devices.

WARNING
Danger to life through electric shock due to unconnected cable shields
Hazardous touch voltages can occur through capacitive cross-coupling due to unconnected
cable shields.
• As a minimum, connect cable shields and the conductors of power cables that are not
used (e.g. brake cores) at one end at the grounded housing potential.

WARNING
Danger to life due to electric shock when not grounded
For missing or incorrectly implemented protective conductor connection for devices with
protection class I, high voltages can be present at open, exposed parts, which when
touched, can result in death or severe injury.
• Ground the device in compliance with the applicable regulations.

WARNING
Danger to life due to electric shock when opening plug connections in operation
When opening plug connections in operation, arcs can result in severe injury or death.
• Only open plug connections when the equipment is in a no-voltage state, unless it has
been explicitly stated that they can be opened in operation.

WARNING
Danger to life due to fire spreading if housing is inadequate
Fire and smoke development can cause severe personal injury or material damage.
• Install devices without a protective housing in a metal control cabinet (or protect the
device by another equivalent measure) in such a way that contact with fire is prevented.
• Ensure that smoke can only escape via controlled and monitored paths.

Control Units and additional system components

20 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Fundamental safety instructions
1.1 General safety instructions

WARNING
Danger to life through unexpected movement of machines when using mobile wireless
devices or mobile phones
Using mobile wireless devices or mobile phones with a transmit power > 1 W closer than
approx. 2 m to the components may cause the devices to malfunction, influence the
functional safety of machines therefore putting people at risk or causing material damage.
• Switch the wireless devices or mobile phones off in the immediate vicinity of the
components.

WARNING
Danger to life due to the motor catching fire in the event of insulation overload
There is higher stress on the motor insulation through a ground fault in an IT system. If the
insulation fails, it is possible that death or severe injury can occur as a result of smoke and
fire.
• Use a monitoring device that signals an insulation fault.
• Correct the fault as quickly as possible so the motor insulation is not overloaded.

WARNING
Danger to life due to fire if overheating occurs because of insufficient ventilation clearances
Inadequate ventilation clearances can cause overheating of components with subsequent
fire and smoke. This can cause severe injury or even death. This can also result in
increased downtime and reduced service lives for devices/systems.
• Ensure compliance with the specified minimum clearance as ventilation clearance for
the respective component.

WARNING
Danger of an accident occurring due to missing or illegible warning labels
Missing or illegible warning labels can result in accidents involving death or serious injury.
• Check that the warning labels are complete based on the documentation.
• Attach any missing warning labels to the components, in the national language if
necessary.
• Replace illegible warning labels.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 21
Fundamental safety instructions
1.2 Safety instructions for electromagnetic fields (EMF)

NOTICE
Device damage caused by incorrect voltage/insulation tests
Incorrect voltage/insulation tests can damage the device.
• Before carrying out a voltage/insulation check of the system/machine, disconnect the
devices as all converters and motors have been subject to a high voltage test by the
manufacturer, and therefore it is not necessary to perform an additional test within the
system/machine.

WARNING
Danger to life when safety functions are inactive
Safety functions that are inactive or that have not been adjusted accordingly can cause
operational faults on machines that could lead to serious injury or death.
• Observe the information in the appropriate product documentation before
commissioning.
• Carry out a safety inspection for functions relevant to safety on the entire system,
including all safety-related components.
• Ensure that the safety functions used in your drives and automation tasks are adjusted
and activated through appropriate parameterizing.
• Perform a function test.
• Only put your plant into live operation once you have guaranteed that the functions
relevant to safety are running correctly.

Note
Important safety notices for safety functions
If you want to use safety functions, you must observe the safety notices in the safety
manuals.

1.2 Safety instructions for electromagnetic fields (EMF)

WARNING
Danger to life from electromagnetic fields
Electromagnetic fields (EMF) are generated by the operation of electrical power equipment
such as transformers, converters or motors.
People with pacemakers or implants are at a special risk in the immediate vicinity of these
devices/systems.
• Ensure that the persons involved are the necessary distance away (minimum 2 m).

Control Units and additional system components

22 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Fundamental safety instructions
1.3 Handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD)

1.3 Handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD)

Electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) are individual components, integrated circuits, modules
or devices that may be damaged by either electric fields or electrostatic discharge.

NOTICE
Damage through electric fields or electrostatic discharge
Electric fields or electrostatic discharge can cause malfunctions through damaged
individual components, integrated circuits, modules or devices.
• Only pack, store, transport and send electronic components, modules or devices in their
original packaging or in other suitable materials, e.g conductive foam rubber of
aluminum foil.
• Only touch components, modules and devices when you are grounded by one of the
following methods:
– Wearing an ESD wrist strap
– Wearing ESD shoes or ESD grounding straps in ESD areas with conductive flooring
• Only place electronic components, modules or devices on conductive surfaces (table
with ESD surface, conductive ESD foam, ESD packaging, ESD transport container).

1.4 Industrial security

Note
Industrial security
Siemens provides automation and drive products with industrial security functions that
support the secure operation of plants or machines. They are an important component in a
holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, our products undergo continuous
development. We therefore recommend that you keep yourself informed with the latest
information and updates of our product.
Information and newsletters can be found at:
http://support.automation.siemens.com
To ensure the secure operation of a plant or machine, it is also necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and to integrate the automation and drive
components into a state-of-the-art holistic industrial security concept for the entire plant or
machine. Any third-party products used must also be taken into account.
For more detailed information, go to:
http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 23
Fundamental safety instructions
1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems

WARNING
Danger as a result of unsafe operating states resulting from software manipulation
Software manipulation (e.g. by viruses, Trojan horses, malware, worms) can cause unsafe
operating states to develop in your installation which can lead to death, severe injuries
and/or material damage.
• Keep the software up to date.
Information and newsletters can be found at:
http://support.automation.siemens.com
• Incorporate the automation and drive components into a state-of-the-art, integrated
industrial security concept for the installation or machine.
For more detailed information, go to:
http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity
• Make sure that you include all installed products into the integrated industrial security
concept.

1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems

The control and drive components of a drive system are approved for industrial and
commercial use in industrial line supplies. Their use in public line supplies requires a
different configuration and/or additional measures.
These components may only be operated in closed housings or in higher-level control
cabinets with protective covers that are closed, and when all of the protective devices are
used.
These components may only be handled by qualified and trained technical personnel who
are knowledgeable and observe all of the safety instructions on the components and in the
associated technical user documentation.
When assessing the machine's risk in accordance with the respective local regulations (e.g.,
EC Machinery Directive), the machine manufacturer must take into account the following
residual risks emanating from the control and drive components of a drive system:
1. Unintentional movements of driven machine components during commissioning,
operation, maintenance, and repairs caused by, for example:
– Hardware defects and/or software errors in the sensors, controllers, actuators, and
connection technology
– Response times of the controller and drive
– Operating and/or ambient conditions outside of the specification
– Condensation / conductive contamination
– Parameterization, programming, cabling, and installation errors
– Use of radio devices / cellular phones in the immediate vicinity of the controller
– External influences / damage

Control Units and additional system components

24 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Fundamental safety instructions
1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems

2. In the event of a fault, exceptionally high temperatures, including an open fire, as well as
emissions of light, noise, particles, gases, etc. can occur inside and outside the inverter,
e.g.:
– Component malfunctions
– Software errors
– Operating and/or ambient conditions outside of the specification
– External influences / damage
Inverters of the Open Type / IP20 degree of protection must be installed in a metal control
cabinet (or protected by another equivalent measure) such that the contact with fire inside
and outside the inverter is not possible.
3. Hazardous shock voltages caused by, for example:
– Component malfunctions
– Influence of electrostatic charging
– Induction of voltages in moving motors
– Operating and/or ambient conditions outside of the specification
– Condensation / conductive contamination
– External influences / damage
4. Electrical, magnetic and electromagnetic fields generated in operation that can pose a
risk to people with a pacemaker, implants or metal replacement joints, etc. if they are too
close.
5. Release of environmental pollutants or emissions as a result of improper operation of the
system and/or failure to dispose of components safely and correctly.

Note
The components must be protected against conductive contamination (e.g. by installing them
in a control cabinet with degree of protection IP54 according to IEC 60529 or NEMA 12).
Assuming that conductive contamination at the installation site can definitely be excluded, a
lower degree of cabinet protection may be permitted.

For more information about residual risks of the components in a drive system, see the
relevant sections in the technical user documentation.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 25
Fundamental safety instructions
1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems

Control Units and additional system components

26 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
System overview 2
2.1 Field of application
SINAMICS is the family of drives from Siemens designed for machine and plant engineering
applications. SINAMICS offers solutions for all drive tasks:
● Simple pump and fan applications in the process industry.
● Complex single drives in centrifuges, presses, extruders, elevators, as well as conveyor
and transport systems
● Drive line-ups in textile, plastic film, and paper machines as well as in rolling mill plants
● High-precision servo drives in the manufacture of wind turbines
● Highly dynamic servo drives for machine tools, as well as packaging and printing
machines

Figure 2-1 SINAMICS applications

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 27
System overview
2.2 Platform Concept and Totally Integrated Automation

Depending on the application, the SINAMICS range offers the ideal variant for any drive
task.
● SINAMICS G is designed for standard applications with induction motors. These
applications have less stringent requirements regarding the dynamic performance of the
motor speed.
● SINAMICS S handles complex drive tasks with synchronous/induction motors and fulfills
stringent requirements regarding:
– the dynamic performance and accuracy
– the integration of extensive technological functions in the drive control system
● SINAMICS DC MASTER is the DC drive belonging to the SINAMICS family. As a result of
its standard expandability, it addresses both basic as well as demanding drive
applications and in complementary markets.

2.2 Platform Concept and Totally Integrated Automation

All SINAMICS versions are based on a platform concept. Joint hardware and software
components, as well as standardized tools for design, configuration, and commissioning
tasks ensure high-level integration across all components. SINAMICS handles a wide variety
of drive tasks with no system gaps. The different SINAMICS versions can be easily
combined with each other.
Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) with SINAMICS S120
Apart from SIMATIC, SIMOTION and SINUMERIK, SINAMICS is one of the core
components of TIA. The STARTER commissioning tool is an integral element of the TIA
platform. It is thus possible to parameterize, program and commission all components in the
automation system using a standardized engineering platform and without any gaps. The
system-wide data management functions ensure consistent data and simplify archiving of
the entire plant project.
SINAMICS S120 supports as standard PROFIBUS DP, the standard fieldbus for the TIA
concept. It provides a high-performance, system-wide communication network which links all
automation components:
● HMI (operator control and monitoring)
● Control
● Drives and I/O
SINAMICS S120 is also available with a PROFINET interface. This Ethernet-based bus
enables control data to be exchanged at high speed via PROFINET IO with IRT or RT and
makes SINAMICS S120 a suitable choice for integration in top-performance multi-axis
applications. At the same time, PROFINET also uses standard IT mechanisms (TCP/IP) to
transport information, e.g. operating and diagnostic data, to higher-level systems. This
makes it easy to integrate into an IT corporate network.

Control Units and additional system components

28 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 System overview
2.2 Platform Concept and Totally Integrated Automation

Figure 2-2 SINAMICS as part of the Siemens modular automation system

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 29
System overview
2.3 Introduction

2.3 Introduction

Figure 2-3 SINAMICS S120 system overview

Modular system for sophisticated drive tasks

SINAMICS S120 solves complex drive tasks for a wide range of industrial applications and
is, therefore, designed as a modular system. Users can choose from many different
harmonized components and functions to create a solution that best meets their
requirements. SIZER, a high-performance engineering tool, makes it easier to choose and
determine the optimum drive configuration.
SINAMICS S120 is supplemented by a wide range of motors. Whether torque, synchronous
or induction motors, whether rotating or linear motors, all of these motors are optimally
supported by SINAMICS S120.

Control Units and additional system components

30 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 System overview
2.3 Introduction

System architecture with a central Control Unit

On the SINAMICS S120, the drive intelligence is combined with closed-loop control functions
into Control Units. These units are capable of controlling drives in the vector, servo and V/f
modes. They also perform the speed and torque control functions plus other intelligent drive
functions for all axes on the drive. Inter-axis connections can be established within a
component and easily configured in the STARTER commissioning tool using a mouse.

Functions for higher efficiency

● Basic functions: Speed control, torque control, positioning functions
● Intelligent starting functions for independent restart after power supply interruption
● BICO technology with interconnection of drive-related I/Os for easy adaptation of the
drive system to its operating environment
● Integrated safety functions for rational implementation of safety concepts
● Regulated infeed/regenerative feedback functions for preventing undesirable reactions on
the supply, allowing recovery of braking energy and ensuring greater stability against line
fluctuations.

DRIVE-CLiQ – the digital interface between SINAMICS components

The SINAMICS S120 components, including the motors and encoders, are interconnected
via a joint serial interface called DRIVE-CLiQ. The standardized cables and connectors
reduce the variety of different parts and cut storage costs. Encoder evaluations for
converting standard encoder signals to DRIVE-CLiQ are available for third-party motors or
retrofit applications.

Electronic rating plates in all components

An important digital linkage element of the SINAMICS S120 drive system are the electronic
type plates integrated in every component. They allow all drive components to be detected
automatically via a DRIVE-CLiQ link. As a result, data does not have to be entered manually
during commissioning or component replacement – helping to ensure that drives are
commissioned more reliably.
The rating plate contains all the relevant technical data about that particular component. In
the motors, for example, this data includes the parameters of the electric equivalent circuit
diagram and characteristic values for the built-in motor encoder.
In addition to the technical data, the rating plate includes logistical data (manufacturer ID,
order number, and ID). Since this data can be called up electronically on site or remotely, all
the components used in a machine can always be individually identified, which helps simplify
servicing.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 31
System overview
2.4 SINAMICS S120 components

2.4 SINAMICS S120 components

Figure 2-4 Overview of SINAMICS S120 components

Control Units and additional system components

32 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 System overview
2.4 SINAMICS S120 components

System components
● Line-side power components, such as fuses, contactors, reactors, and filters for switching
the power supply and meeting EMC requirements.
● Line Modules, which supply power centrally to the DC link
● DC link components (optional), which stabilize the DC link voltage.
● Motor Modules, which act as inverters, receive power from the DC link, and supply the
connected motors
To carry out the required functions, SINAMICS S120 is equipped with:
● Control Units that process the drive and technological functions across all axes
● Additional system components to expand the functionality and to handle various
interfaces for encoders and process signals
SINAMICS S120 components are intended for installation in cabinets. They have the
following features and characteristics:
● Easy to handle, simple installation and wiring
● Practical connection system, cable routing in accordance with EMC requirements
● Standardized design, side-by-side mounting

Note
Installation location in the cabinet
The SINAMICS S120 components must always be mounted vertically in the cabinet. Other
permissible installation locations are given in the descriptions for the individual components.

Booksize format
Booksize format units are optimized for multi-axis applications and are mounted adjacent to
one another. The connection for the shared voltage-source DC link is an integral feature.
The booksize format offers various cooling options:
● Internal air cooling
● External air cooling
● Cold plate cooling
● Liquid Cooled

Booksize compact format

The booksize compact format combines all benefits of the booksize format and provides the
same performance with an even smaller overall height. The booksize compact format is thus
particularly well suited for integration into machines with high dynamic requirements and
confined installation conditions.
The booksize compact format offers the following cooling options:
● Internal air cooling
● Cold plate cooling

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 33
System overview
2.5 Power units

2.5 Power units

Line Modules
Generating a DC voltage for the DC link from the 3-phase line voltage.
● Basic Line Modules
Basic Line Modules generate a non-regulated DC link voltage and are not capable of
regenerative feedback.
● Smart Line Modules
The Smart Line Modules generate a non-regulated DC link voltage and are capable of
regenerative feedback.
● Active Line Modules
The Active Line Modules generate a regulated DC link voltage and are capable of
regenerative feedback.

Motor Modules
Convert energy from the DC link for the connected motors with variable voltage and variable
frequency.

2.6 System data

Unless explicitly specified otherwise, the following technical data are valid for components of
the SINAMICS S120 booksize drive system.

Table 2- 1 Electrical data

Electronics power supply 24 VDC -15/+20% 1), protective extra low voltage PELV or SELV
Line connection voltage 380 ... 480 V 3 AC ±10 %
(-15 % < 1 min)
Line frequency 47 … 63 Hz

Radio interference suppression Category C3 (standard)

acc. to EN 61800-3 Category C2 (option)
for systems implemented in conformance with the EC
Declaration of Conformity for EMC and Configuration Manual,
EMC Installation Guidelines, Order No.: 6FC5297-xAD30-0APx
Overvoltage category III
Pollution degree 2
1) The supply voltage may not exceed the minimum value of 24 V - -15 % on the last device in the assembly, as otherwise
malfunctions can occur. The amplitude of the test current must be set adequately high for this. In order to avoid
exceeding the 24 V supply voltage, the voltage can be supplied at different points in the line-up.

Control Units and additional system components

34 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 System overview
2.6 System data

Table 2- 2 Environmental conditions

Degree of protection IPXXB acc. to EN 60529,

open type according to UL 508
Degree of protection for SME20/25/120/125 and DME20 IP67, with mounted connectors or protective caps
Protection class, line supply circuits I with protective conductor connection)
Electronic circuits safety extra-low voltage PELV / SELV
Permissible ambient temperature in the cabinet during 0 °C to +55 °C up to 2000 m above sea level.
operation Above an altitude of 2000 m, the max. ambient temperature
decreases by 3.5 °C every 500 m.
Installation altitude: max. 4000 m above sea level
Chemically active substances
Long-term storage in the transport packaging Class 1C2 according to EN 60721-3-1
Transport in the transport packaging Class 2C2 according to EN 60721-3-2
Operation Class 3C2 according to EN 60721-3-3
Biological environmental conditions
Long-term storage in the transport packaging Class 1B1 according to EN 60721-3-1
Transport in the transport packaging Class 2B1 according to EN 60721-3-2
Operation Class 3B1 according to EN 60721-3-3
Vibratory load
Long-term storage in the transport packaging Class 1M2 according to EN 60721-3-1
Transport in the transport packaging Class 2M3 according to EN 60721-3-2
Shock load
Long-term storage in the transport packaging Class 1M2 according to EN 60721-3-1
Transport in the transport packaging Class 2M3 according to EN 60721-3-2
Operation (except SME20/25/120/125) Test values: 15 g / 11 ms
Test values for SME20/25/120/125 and DME20
Operation Test values: 25 g / 6 ms
Climatic environmental conditions
Long-term storage in the transport packaging Class 1K4 acc. to EN 60721-3-1
Temperature: -25 … +55 °C
Transport in the transport packaging Class 2K4 acc. to EN 60721-3-2
Temperature: -40 … +70 °C
Operation Class 3K3 acc. to EN 60721-3-3
Temperature: 0 … +40 °C1)
Relative humidity: 5 … 90 %
Oil mist, salt mist, ice formation, condensation, dripping water,
spraying water, splashing water and water jets are not permitted
SME20/25/120/125 and DME20
Operation Temperature: 0 … +55 °C
Humidity: ≥ 5 % to ≤ 65 % annual average
≤ 85 % for max. 2 months / year
moisture condensation and the formation of ice not permissible
1) The components described in this manual comply with Class 3K3 according to EN 60721-3-3. However, the
components can be operated in the control cabinet in a wider temperature range than defined in Class 3K3 (0 °C to
+55 °C).

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 35
System overview
2.7 Recycling and disposal

Table 2- 3 Certificates

Declarations of Conformity CE (Low-Voltage and EMC Directives)

Approvals cULus

2.7 Recycling and disposal

Dispose of the product according to the applicable national regulations.
The products described in this Equipment Manual are extensively recyclable on account of
the low-toxic composition of the materials used. To recycle and dispose of your old device in
an environmentally friendly way, please contact a company that disposes of electronic
waste.

Control Units and additional system components

36 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
Control Units and operating elements 3
3.1 Introduction

Description
Control Units CU320-2 PN and CU320-2 DP of the SINAMICS S system are designed for
use with several drives.
The number of variable-speed drives depends on:
● The required performance
● The required additional functions
● The required operating mode (servo, vector or U/f)
The software and the parameters are stored on a plug-in memory card.
The option slot is used to expand the number of terminals or adapt to other communication
interfaces (to the higher-level control).

Compatible firmware versions:

● CU320-2 PN V4.4 or higher
● CU320-2 DP V4.3 or higher

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 37
Control Units and operating elements
3.1 Introduction

① Cover
② Blanking cover
③ Option Board (optional)
④ Memory card
Figure 3-1 Overview, Control Unit CU320-2 PN

Control Units and additional system components

38 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.1 Introduction

① Cover
② Blanking cover
③ Option Board (optional)
④ Memory card
Figure 3-2 Overview, Control Unit CU320-2 DP

Note
The Control Unit, the option board, and the memory card must be ordered separately.

If your application requires more than one Control Unit, the number can be increased
accordingly. The Control Units are then interconnected via PROFIBUS, for example.
A Control Unit communicates with the associated components (Motor Modules, Line
Modules, Sensor Modules, Terminal Modules, and so on) via the system-internal DRIVE-
CLiQ interface.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 39
Control Units and operating elements
3.1 Introduction

Figure 3-3 Sample configuration

Control Units and additional system components

40 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.2 Safety instructions for Control Units

3.2 Safety instructions for Control Units

WARNING
Danger to life if the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks are not carefully
observed
If the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks in Chapter 1 (Page 19) are not
observed, accidents involving severe injuries or death may occur.
• Adhere to the fundamental safety instructions.
• When assessing the risk, take into account remaining risks.

WARNING
Risk of fire through overheating if there are insufficient ventilation clearances
Insufficient ventilation clearances lead to overheating with associated risk to persons as a
result of smoke and fire. This can also result in more downtimes and a reduced service life
for the Control Unit.
• For this reason, it is imperative that you maintain the 80 mm clearances above and
below the Control Unit.

NOTICE
Risk of destroying components resulting from high discharge currents
The Control Unit or other PROFIBUS and/or PROFINET nodes can be destroyed, if
significant discharge currents flow via the PROFIBUS or PROFINET cable.
• A functional equipotential bonding conductor with a cross-section of at least 25 mm²
must be used between components in a system that are located at a distance from each
other.

NOTICE
Malfunctions or damage to the option board by inserting and withdrawing in operation
Withdrawing and inserting the option board in operation can damage it or cause it to
malfunction.
• Only withdraw or insert the Option Board when the Control Unit is current-free.

NOTICE
Damage through use of incorrect DRIVE-CLiQ cables
Damage or malfunctions can occur on the devices or system when incorrect or unreleased
DRIVE-CLiQ cables are used.
• Only use suitable DRIVE-CLiQ cables that have been released by Siemens for the
respective application.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 41
Control Units and operating elements
3.2 Safety instructions for Control Units

Note
Malfunctions due to polluted DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces
Malfunctions can occur in the system through the use of polluted DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces.
• Cover unused DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces with the supplied blanking covers.

Note
Function equipotential bonding for distributed DRIVE-CLiQ nodes
Integrate all of the components that are connected via DRIVE-CLiQ in the functional
equipotential bonding concept. The connection should be preferably established by mounting
on metallic bare machine and plant components that are connected with one another using
an equipotential bonding conductor.
Alternatively, you can establish equipotential bonding using a conductor (min. 6 mm²), which
as far as possible, is routed in parallel to the DRIVE-CLiQ cable. This applies to all
distributed DRIVE-CLiQ nodes such as DM20, SME2x, SME12x, etc.

Control Units and additional system components

42 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.3 Control Unit CU320-2 PN (PROFINET)

3.3 Control Unit CU320-2 PN (PROFINET)

3.3.1 Description
The Control Unit CU320-2 PN is a central control module in which the closed-loop and open-
loop functions are implemented for one or more Line Modules and/or Motor Modules. It can
be used with firmware version 4.4 or higher.
The CU320-2 PN has the following interfaces (ports):

Table 3- 1 Overview of the CU320-2 PN interfaces

Type Quantity
Isolated digital inputs 12
Non-isolated digital inputs/outputs 8
DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces 4
PROFINET interfaces 2
LAN (Ethernet) 1
Serial interface (RS232) 1
Option slot 1
Measuring socket contacts 3

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 43
Control Units and operating elements
3.3 Control Unit CU320-2 PN (PROFINET)

3.3.2 Interface description

3.3.2.1 Overview

Figure 3-4 Interface overview CU320-2 PN (without cover and blanking cover)

Control Units and additional system components

44 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.3 Control Unit CU320-2 PN (PROFINET)

Figure 3-5 Interface X140 and measuring socket contacts - CU320-2 PN (view from below)

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 45
Control Units and operating elements
3.3 Control Unit CU320-2 PN (PROFINET)

Figure 3-6 Installing a PCB plug connector (from Phoenix Contact) into the measuring socket
contacts

Control Units and additional system components

46 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.3 Control Unit CU320-2 PN (PROFINET)

3.3.2.2 X100-X103 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces

Table 3- 2 X100-X103 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) Power supply
B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Connector DRIVE-CLiQ socket
type

The blanking covers for the DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces are included in the scope of delivery.
Blanking covers (50 x) order number: 6SL3066-4CA00-0AA0

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 47
Control Units and operating elements
3.3 Control Unit CU320-2 PN (PROFINET)

3.3.2.3 X122 digital inputs/outputs

Table 3- 3 X122 digital inputs/outputs

Terminal Designation1) Technical data

1 DI 0 Voltage (max.): -3 … +30 V DC
2 DI 1 Current consumption, typical: 9 mA at 24 V
Electrical isolation: The reference potential is terminal
3 DI 2 M1
4 DI 3 Signal level (incl. ripple)
5 DI 16 High level: 15 … 30 V
6 DI 17 Low level: -3 … +5 V
Input delay (typ.):
For "0" → "1": 50 μs
For "1" → "0": 150 μs
7 M1 Reference potential for terminals 1 … 6
8 M Electronics ground
9 DI/DO 8 As input:
10 DI/DO 9 Voltage: -3 … +30 V DC
Current consumption, typical: 9 mA at 24 V
11 M
Signal level (incl. ripple)
12 DI/DO 10 High level: 15 … 30 V
13 DI/DO 11 Low level: -3 … +5 V
14 M DI/DO 8, 9, 10, and 11 are "rapid inputs" 2)
Input delay (typ.)
For "0" → "1": 5 μs
For "1" → "0": 50 μs
As output:
Voltage: 24 V DC
Max. load current per output: 500 mA
Continuous short-circuit proof
Output delay (typ./max):3)
For "0" → "1": 150 μs / 400 μs
For "1" → "0": 75 μs / 100 μs
Switching frequency:
for ohmic load: Max. 100 Hz
For inductive load: Max. 0.5 Hz
For lamp load: Max. 10 Hz
Maximum lamp load: 5 W
Type: Spring-loaded terminal 3 (Page 359)
Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm2
1) DI: digital input; DI/DO: bidirectional digital input/output; M: electronics ground; M1: reference potential
2) The rapid inputs can be used as probe inputs or as inputs for the external zero mark.
3) Data for: Vcc = 24 V; load 48 Ω; high ("1") = 90% Vout; low ("0") = 10% Vout

The maximum cable length that can be connected is 30 m.

Control Units and additional system components

48 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.3 Control Unit CU320-2 PN (PROFINET)

Note
Ensuring the function of digital inputs
An open input is interpreted as "low".
Terminal M1 must be connected so that the digital inputs (DI) can function.
This is achieved by using one of the following measures:
1. Providing the ground reference of the digital inputs
2. A jumper to terminal M (Please observe: This removes the electrical isolation for these
digital inputs.)

Note
If the 24 V supply is briefly interrupted, then the digital outputs are deactivated during this
time.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 49
Control Units and operating elements
3.3 Control Unit CU320-2 PN (PROFINET)

3.3.2.4 X132 digital inputs/outputs

Table 3- 4 X132 digital inputs/outputs

Terminal Designation1) Technical data

1 DI 4 Voltage (max.): -3 … +30 V DC
2 DI 5 Current consumption, typical: 9 mA at 24 V
Electrical isolation: The reference potential is terminal
3 DI 6 M2
4 DI 7 Signal level (including ripple)
5 DI 20 High level: 15 … 30 V
6 DI 21 Low level: -3 … +5 V
Input delay (typ.):
For "0" → "1": 50 μs
For "1" → "0": 150 μs
7 M2 Reference potential for terminals 1 … 6
8 M Electronics ground
9 DI/DO 12 As input:
10 DI/DO 13 Voltage: -3 … +30 V DC
Current consumption, typical: 9 mA at 24 V
11 M
Signal level (including ripple)
12 DI/DO 14 High level: 15 … 30 V
13 DI/DO 15 Low level: -3 … +5 V
14 M DI/DO 12, 13, 14, and 15 are "rapid inputs" 2)
Input delay (typ.):
For "0" → "1": 5 μs
For "1" → "0": 50 μs
As output:
Voltage: 24 V DC
Max. load current per output: 500 mA
Continuous short-circuit proof
Output delay (typ./max):3)
For "0" → "1": 150 μs / 400 μs
For "1" → "0": 75 μs / 100 μs
Switching frequency:
for ohmic load: Max. 100 Hz
For inductive load: Max. 0.5 Hz
For lamp load: Max. 10 Hz
Maximum lamp load: 5 W
Type: Spring-loaded terminal 3 (Page 359)
Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm2
1) DI: digital input; DI/DO: bidirectional digital input/output; M: electronics ground; M2: reference potential
2) The rapid inputs can be used as probe inputs or as inputs for the external zero mark
3) Data for: Vcc = 24 V; load 48 Ω; high ("1") = 90% Vout; low ("0") = 10% Vout

The maximum cable length that can be connected is 30 m.

Control Units and additional system components

50 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.3 Control Unit CU320-2 PN (PROFINET)

Note
Ensuring the function of digital inputs
An open input is interpreted as "low".
To enable the digital inputs (DI) to function, terminal M2 must be connected.
This is achieved by using one of the following measures:
1. Providing the ground reference of the digital inputs
2. A jumper to terminal M (Please observe: This removes the electrical isolation for these
digital inputs.)

Note
If the 24 V supply is briefly interrupted, then the digital outputs are deactivated during this
time.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 51
Control Units and operating elements
3.3 Control Unit CU320-2 PN (PROFINET)

3.3.2.5 X124 electronics power supply

Table 3- 5 X124 electronics power supply

Terminal Designation Technical data

+ Electronics power supply Voltage: 24 V DC (20.4 ... 28.8 V)
+ Electronics power supply Current consumption: max. 1.0 A
M Electronics ground (without DRIVE-CLiQ or digital outputs)

M Electronics ground Max. current via jumper in connector: 20 A (15 A

according to UL/CSA)

Type: Screw terminal 2 (Page 360)

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 2.5 mm2

The maximum cable length that can be connected is 10 m.

Note
The two "+" or "M" terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures that the supply
voltage is looped through.
The current consumption increases by the value for the DRIVE-CLiQ node and digital
outputs.

Note
The terminal block must be screwed on tightly using a flat-bladed screwdriver.

Control Units and additional system components

52 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.3 Control Unit CU320-2 PN (PROFINET)

3.3.2.6 X127 LAN (Ethernet)

Table 3- 6 X127 LAN (Ethernet)

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 TXP Ethernet transmit data +
2 TXN Ethernet transmit data -
3 RXP Ethernet receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Ethernet receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
Connector type: RJ45 socket

Note
The LAN (Ethernet) interface does not support Auto MDI(X). For this reason, only crossed
cables may be used to connect devices.

For diagnostic purposes, the X127 LAN interface features a green and a yellow LED. These
LEDs indicate the following status information:

Table 3- 7 LED statuses for the X127 LAN interface

LED Color Status Description

Link port - Off Missing or faulty link
Green Continuous light 10 or 100 Mbit link available
Activity port - Off No activity
Yellow Flashing light Sending or receiving

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 53
Control Units and operating elements
3.3 Control Unit CU320-2 PN (PROFINET)

3.3.2.7 X140 serial interface (RS232)

An external display and operator device for operator control/parameterization can be
connected via the serial interface. The interface is located on the lower side of the Control
Unit.

Table 3- 8 X140 serial interface (RS232)

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 Reserved, do not use
2 RxD Receive data
3 TxD Transmit data
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Ground Ground reference
6 Reserved, do not use
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
9 Reserved, do not use

Connector type: 9-pin SUB D connector

Control Units and additional system components

54 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.3 Control Unit CU320-2 PN (PROFINET)

3.3.2.8 X150 P1/P2 PROFINET

The PROFINET interfaces can be operated isochronously.

Table 3- 9 X150 P1 and X150 P2 PROFINET

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 RXP Receive data +
2 RXN Receive data -
3 TXP Transmit data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 TXN Transmit data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
Connector type: RJ45 socket
Cable type: PROFINET

Note
The PROFINET interfaces support Auto MDI(X). It is therefore possible to use both crossed
and uncrossed cables to connect the devices.

For diagnostic purposes, the two PROFINET interfaces are equipped with a green and a
yellow LED. These LEDs indicate the following status information:

Table 3- 10 LED states at the X150 P1/P2 PROFINET interface

LED Color Status Description

Link port - Off Missing or faulty link
Green Continuous light 10 or 100 Mbit link available
Activity port - Off No activity
Yellow Flashing light Data is being received or sent at port x

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 55
Control Units and operating elements
3.3 Control Unit CU320-2 PN (PROFINET)

3.3.2.9 Measuring socket contacts

Table 3- 11 Measuring socket contacts

Socket Function Technical data

M Ground Voltage: 0… 5 V
T0 Measuring socket contact 0 Resolution: 8 bits
Load current: max. 3 mA
T1 Measuring socket contact 1 Continuous short-circuit proof
T2 Measuring socket contact 2 The reference potential is terminal M

PCB plug connector from Phoenix Contact, type: ZEC 1.0/ 4-ST-3.5 C1 R1.4, order number: 1893708

Note
Cable cross section
The measuring socket contacts are only suitable for cable cross-sections of 0.2 mm2 to
1 mm2.

Note
Using the measuring socket contacts
The measuring socket contacts support commissioning and diagnostic functions. It must not
be connected for normal operation.

3.3.2.10 DIAG button

The DIAG pushbutton is reserved for service functions.

Control Units and additional system components

56 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.3 Control Unit CU320-2 PN (PROFINET)

3.3.2.11 Slot for memory card

Figure 3-7 Slot for memory card

WARNING
Danger to life through software manipulation when using removable storage media
The storage of files on removable storage media involves a high risk of infection, e.g. via
viruses or malware. As a result of incorrect parameterization, machines can malfunction,
which in turn can lead to injuries or death.
• Protect the files on removable storage media against malware through appropriate
protective measures, e.g. virus scanners.

Note
Possible plant standstill by withdrawing or inserting the memory card in operation
If the memory card is withdrawn or inserted during operation, then data can be lost, possibly
resulting in a plant standstill.
• Only withdraw and insert the memory card when the Control Unit is in a no-voltage
condition.

Note
Insertion direction for the memory card
Only insert the memory card as shown in the photo above (arrow at top right).

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 57
Control Units and operating elements
3.3 Control Unit CU320-2 PN (PROFINET)

NOTICE
Memory card damage caused by electric fields or electrostatic discharge
Electrical fields or electrostatic discharge may result in the memory card being damaged.
• When removing and inserting the memory card, always observe the ESD regulations
(Page 23).

Note
Possible data loss when returning the Control Unit with memory card
When returning a defective Control Unit for repair or testing, the data on the memory card
(parameters, firmware, licenses, etc.) could be lost.
• Do not return the memory card as well, but keep it in a safe place so that it can be
inserted in the replacement unit.

Note
Please note that only SIEMENS memory cards can be used to operate the Control Unit.

Control Units and additional system components

58 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.3 Control Unit CU320-2 PN (PROFINET)

3.3.3 Connection example

Figure 3-8 Connection example of a Control Unit CU320-2 PN

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 59
Control Units and operating elements
3.3 Control Unit CU320-2 PN (PROFINET)

3.3.4 Meaning of the LEDs

3.3.4.1 Description of the LED statuses

The different statuses that arise during the booting procedure are indicated by means of the
LEDs on the Control Unit.
● The duration of the individual statuses varies.
● If an error occurs, the booting procedure is terminated and the cause is indicated
accordingly via the LEDs.
● Once the unit has successfully booted up, all the LEDs are switched off briefly.
● Once the unit has booted up, the LEDs are controlled via the loaded software.

3.3.4.2 Behavior of the LEDs during booting

Table 3- 12 Load software

LED Status Comment

RDY COM OPT
Red Orange Orange Reset Hardware reset
RDY LED lights up red, all other LEDs
light up orange
Red Red Off BIOS loaded –
Red Red Off BIOS error • Error occurred while loading the BIOS
flashing
light 2 Hz
Red Red Off File error • Memory card not inserted or faulty
flashing flashing • Software on memory card not present
light 2 Hz light 2 Hz or corrupted
Red Orange Off FW loading RDY LED lights up red, COM LED flashes
flashing orange without fixed frequency
light
Red Off Off FW loaded –
Off Red Off FW checked –
(no CRC error)
Red Red Off FW checked • CRC invalid
flashing flashing (CRC error)
light 0.5 Hz light 0.5 Hz

Table 3- 13 Firmware

LED Status Comment

RDY COM OPT
Orange Off Off Initializing –
Alternating Running See the table below

Control Units and additional system components

60 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.3 Control Unit CU320-2 PN (PROFINET)

3.3.4.3 Behavior of the LEDs in the operating state

Table 3- 14 Control Unit CU320-2 PN – Description of the LEDs after booting

LED Color Status Description, cause Remedy

RDY – OFF Electronics power supply is missing or outside the Check power supply
(READY) permissible tolerance range.
Green Continuou The component is ready for operation and cyclic –
s light DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking place.
Flashing Commissioning/reset –
light
0.5 Hz
Flashing Writing to the memory card –
light
2 Hz
Red Flashing General error Check parameterization /
light configuration
2 Hz
Red/ Flashing Control Unit is ready for operation. Obtain licenses
green light However, there are no software licenses.
0.5 Hz
Orange Flashing Updating the firmware of the DRIVE-CLiQ –
light components
0.5 Hz
Flashing DRIVE-CLiQ component firmware update Turn POWER ON for the
light complete. Wait for POWER ON for the components in question
2 Hz components in question.
Green/ Flashing Component detection via LED is activated –
orange light (p0124[0]).
or 2 Hz Note:
red/
Both options depend on the LED status when
orange
component recognition is activated via p0124[0] =
1.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 61
Control Units and operating elements
3.3 Control Unit CU320-2 PN (PROFINET)

LED Color Status Description, cause Remedy

COM – Off Cyclic communication has not (yet) taken place. –
PROFIdrive Note:
cyclic
PROFIdrive is ready for communication when the
operation
Control Unit is ready (see LED RDY).
Green Continuou Cyclic communication is taking place. –
s light
Flashing Full cyclic communication has not yet taken place. –
light Possible causes:
0.5 Hz
• The controller is not transferring any setpoints.
• During isochronous operation, no global
control (GC) or a faulty global control (GC) is
transferred by the controller.
• "Shared Device" is selected (p8929=2) and
only one controller connected.
Red Flashing Bus error, Adapt configuration between
light incorrect parameter assignment/configuration controller and devices
0.5 Hz
Flashing Cyclic bus communication has been interrupted or Remove fault
light could not be established
2 Hz
OPT – Off Electronics power supply is missing or outside the Check power supply and/or
(OPTION) permissible tolerance range. component
Component is not ready.
Option board not installed or no associated drive
object has been created.
Green Continuou Option board is ready. –
s light
Flashing Depends on the option board used. –
light
0.5 Hz
Red Flashing This component has at least one fault. Remove the fault and
light The Option Board is not ready (e.g. after switching acknowledge
2 Hz on).
RDY and DP Red Flashing Bus error - communication has been interrupted Remove fault
light
2 Hz
RDY and OPT Orange Flashing Firmware update in progress for connected Option –
light Board CBE20
0.5 Hz

Control Units and additional system components

62 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.3 Control Unit CU320-2 PN (PROFINET)

3.3.5 Dimension drawing

Figure 3-9 Dimension drawing of CU320-2 PN, all data in mm and (inches)

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 63
Control Units and operating elements
3.3 Control Unit CU320-2 PN (PROFINET)

3.3.6 Technical data

Table 3- 15 Technical data

6SL3040-1MA01-0AA0 Unit Value

Electronics power supply
Voltage VDC 24 (20,4 … 28,8)
Current (without DRIVE-CLiQ and ADC 1,0
digital outputs)
Power loss W 24
Total maximum permissible output A 5,5
currents
Maximum DRIVE-CLiQ cable length m 100
PE/ground connection On the housing with M5/3 Nm screw
Response time The response time of digital inputs/outputs depends on the
evaluation (refer to the function diagram).
Further information:
SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual,
Chapter "Function block diagrams".
Weight kg 2,3

Control Units and additional system components

64 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.4 Control Unit CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS)

3.4 Control Unit CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS)

3.4.1 Description
The Control Unit CU320-2 DP is a central control module in which the closed-loop and open-
loop functions are implemented for one or more Line Modules and/or Motor Modules. It can
be used with firmware version 4.3 or higher.
The CU320-2 DP has the following interfaces (ports):

Table 3- 16 Overview of the CU320-2 DP interfaces

Type Quantity
Isolated digital inputs 12
Non-isolated digital inputs/outputs 8
DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces 4
PROFIBUS interface 1
LAN (Ethernet) 1
Serial interface (RS232) 1
Option slot 1
Measuring socket contacts 3

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 65
Control Units and operating elements
3.4 Control Unit CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS)

3.4.2 Interface description

3.4.2.1 Overview

Figure 3-10 Interface overview CU320-2 DP (without cover and blanking cover)

Control Units and additional system components

66 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.4 Control Unit CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS)

Figure 3-11 Interface X140 and measuring sockets T0 to T2 - CU320-2 DP (view from below)

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 67
Control Units and operating elements
3.4 Control Unit CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS)

Figure 3-12 Installing a PCB plug connector (from Phoenix Contact) into the measuring socket
contacts

Control Units and additional system components

68 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.4 Control Unit CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS)

3.4.2.2 X100-X103 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces

Table 3- 17 X100-X103 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) Power supply
B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Connector DRIVE-CLiQ socket
type

The blanking covers for the DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces are included in the scope of delivery.
Blanking covers (50 x) order number: 6SL3066-4CA00-0AA0

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 69
Control Units and operating elements
3.4 Control Unit CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS)

3.4.2.3 X122 digital inputs/outputs

Table 3- 18 X122 digital inputs/outputs

Terminal Designation1) Technical data

1 DI 0 Voltage (max.): -3 … +30 V DC
2 DI 1 Current consumption, typical: 9 mA at 24 V
Electrical isolation: The reference potential is terminal
3 DI 2 M1
4 DI 3 Signal level (incl. ripple)
5 DI 16 High level: 15 … 30 V
6 DI 17 Low level: -3 … +5 V
Input delay (typ.):
For "0" → "1": 50 μs
For "1" → "0": 150 μs
7 M1 Reference potential for terminals 1 … 6
8 M Electronics ground
9 DI/DO 8 As input:
10 DI/DO 9 Voltage: -3 … +30 V DC
Current consumption, typical: 9 mA at 24 V
11 M
Signal level (incl. ripple)
12 DI/DO 10 High level: 15 … 30 V
13 DI/DO 11 Low level: -3 … +5 V
14 M DI/DO 8, 9, 10, and 11 are "rapid inputs" 2)
Input delay (typ.)
For "0" → "1": 5 μs
For "1" → "0": 50 μs
As output:
Voltage: 24 V DC
Max. load current per output: 500 mA
Continuous short-circuit proof
Output delay (typ./max):3)
For "0" → "1": 150 μs / 400 μs
For "1" → "0": 75 μs / 100 μs
Switching frequency:
for ohmic load: Max. 100 Hz
For inductive load: Max. 0.5 Hz
For lamp load: Max. 10 Hz
Maximum lamp load: 5 W
Type: Spring-loaded terminal 3 (Page 359)
Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm2
1) DI: digital input; DI/DO: bidirectional digital input/output; M: electronics ground; M1: reference potential
2) The rapid inputs can be used as probe inputs or as inputs for the external zero mark.
3) Data for: Vcc = 24 V; load 48 Ω; high ("1") = 90% Vout; low ("0") = 10% Vout

The maximum cable length that can be connected is 30 m.

Control Units and additional system components

70 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.4 Control Unit CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS)

Note
Ensuring the function of digital inputs
An open input is interpreted as "low".
Terminal M1 must be connected so that the digital inputs (DI) can function.
This is achieved by using one of the following measures:
1. Providing the ground reference of the digital inputs
2. A jumper to terminal M (Please observe: This removes the electrical isolation for these
digital inputs.)

Note
If the 24 V supply is briefly interrupted, then the digital outputs are deactivated during this
time.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 71
Control Units and operating elements
3.4 Control Unit CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS)

3.4.2.4 X132 digital inputs/outputs

Table 3- 19 X132 digital inputs/outputs

Terminal Designation1) Technical data

1 DI 4 Voltage (max.): -3 … +30 V DC
2 DI 5 Current consumption, typical: 9 mA at 24 V
Electrical isolation: The reference potential is terminal
3 DI 6 M2
4 DI 7 Signal level (including ripple)
5 DI 20 High level: 15 … 30 V
6 DI 21 Low level: -3 … +5 V
Input delay (typ.):
For "0" → "1": 50 μs
For "1" → "0": 150 μs
7 M2 Reference potential for terminals 1 … 6
8 M Electronics ground
9 DI/DO 12 As input:
10 DI/DO 13 Voltage: -3 … +30 V DC
Current consumption, typical: 9 mA at 24 V
11 M
Signal level (including ripple)
12 DI/DO 14 High level: 15 … 30 V
13 DI/DO 15 Low level: -3 … +5 V
14 M DI/DO 12, 13, 14, and 15 are "rapid inputs" 2)
Input delay (typ.):
For "0" → "1": 5 μs
For "1" → "0": 50 μs
As output:
Voltage: 24 V DC
Max. load current per output: 500 mA
Continuous short-circuit proof
Output delay (typ./max):3)
For "0" → "1": 150 μs / 400 μs
For "1" → "0": 75 μs / 100 μs
Switching frequency:
for ohmic load: Max. 100 Hz
For inductive load: Max. 0.5 Hz
For lamp load: Max. 10 Hz
Maximum lamp load: 5 W
Type: Spring-loaded terminal 3 (Page 359)
Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm2
1) DI: digital input; DI/DO: bidirectional digital input/output; M: electronics ground; M2: reference potential
2) The rapid inputs can be used as probe inputs or as inputs for the external zero mark
3) Data for: Vcc = 24 V; load 48 Ω; high ("1") = 90% Vout; low ("0") = 10% Vout

The maximum cable length that can be connected is 30 m.

Control Units and additional system components

72 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.4 Control Unit CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS)

Note
Ensuring the function of digital inputs
An open input is interpreted as "low".
To enable the digital inputs (DI) to function, terminal M2 must be connected.
This is achieved by using one of the following measures:
1. Providing the ground reference of the digital inputs
2. A jumper to terminal M (Please observe: This removes the electrical isolation for these
digital inputs.)

Note
If the 24 V supply is briefly interrupted, then the digital outputs are deactivated during this
time.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 73
Control Units and operating elements
3.4 Control Unit CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS)

3.4.2.5 X124 electronics power supply

Table 3- 20 X124 electronics power supply

Terminal Designation Technical data

+ Electronics power supply Voltage: 24 V DC (20.4 ... 28.8 V)
+ Electronics power supply Current consumption: max. 1.0 A
M Electronics ground (without DRIVE-CLiQ or digital outputs)

M Electronics ground Max. current via jumper in connector: 20 A (15 A

according to UL/CSA)

Type: Screw terminal 2 (Page 360)

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 2.5 mm2

The maximum cable length that can be connected is 10 m.

Note
The two "+" or "M" terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures that the supply
voltage is looped through.
The current consumption increases by the value for the DRIVE-CLiQ node and digital
outputs.

Note
The terminal block must be screwed on tightly using a flat-bladed screwdriver.

Control Units and additional system components

74 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.4 Control Unit CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS)

3.4.2.6 X126 PROFIBUS

The PROFIBUS interface can be operated isochronously.

Table 3- 21 X126 PROFIBUS interface

Pin Signal name Meaning Range

1 - Not assigned
2 M24_SERV Teleservice supply, ground 0V
3 RxD / TxD–P Receive/transmit data P (B) RS485
4 CNTR–P Control signal TTL
5 DGND PROFIBUS data reference potential
6 VP Supply voltage plus 5 V ± 10%
7 P24_SERV Teleservice supply, + (24 V) 24 V (20.4 … 28.8 V)
8 RxD / TxD–N Receive/transmit data N (A) RS485
9 - Not assigned

Connector type: 9-pin Sub-D socket

A teleservice adapter can be connected to the PROFIBUS interface for remote diagnostics.
The power supply for the teleservice (terminals 2 and 7) can have a load of up to 150 mA.

NOTICE
Damage to the Control Unit or other PROFIBUS nodes as a result of high leakage currents
If a suitable equipotential bonding conductor is not used, high leakage currents that could
destroy the Control Unit or other PROFIBUS nodes can flow through the PROFIBUS cable.
• An equipotential bonding conductor with a cross-section of at least 25 mm² must be
used between components in a system that are located at a distance from each other.

NOTICE
Damage to the Control Unit or other CAN nodes by connecting a CAN cable
If a CAN cable is connected to the X126 interface, the Control Unit or other CAN bus nodes
can be damaged.
• Do not connect a CAN cable to the X126 interface.

PROFIBUS connectors
The first and last nodes in a bus must contain terminating resistors. Otherwise, data
transmission will not function correctly.
The bus terminating resistors are activated in the connector.
The cable shield must be connected at both ends and over a large surface area.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 75
Control Units and operating elements
3.4 Control Unit CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS)

3.4.2.7 PROFIBUS address switch

On the CU320-2 DP, the PROFIBUS address is set as a hexadecimal value via two rotary
coding switches. Values between 0dec (00hex) and 127dec (7Fhex) can be set as the address.
The upper rotary coding switch (H) is used to set the hexadecimal value for 161 and the
lower rotary coding switch (L) is used to set the hexadecimal value for 160.

Table 3- 22 PROFIBUS address switch

Rotary coding Significance Examples

switches 21dec 35dec 126dec
15hex 23hex 7Ehex
161 = 16 1 2 7

160 = 1 5 3 E

Setting the PROFIBUS address

The factory setting for the rotary coding switches is 0dec (00hex).
There are two ways to set the PROFIBUS address:
1. Via a parameter (see SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual)
– To set the bus address for a PROFIBUS node using STARTER, first set the rotary
code switches to 0dec (00hex) and/or 127dec (7Fhex).
– Use the parameter to set the address to a value between 1 and 126.
2. Using the PROFIBUS address switches on the Control Unit
– The address is set manually to values between 1 and 126 using the rotary coding
switches. In this case, the parameter is only used to read the address.

Note
The rotary coding switches used to set the PROFIBUS address are located beneath the
cover.

More information
Additional information about setting the PROFIBUS address is provided in the following
document:
SINAMICS S120 Function Manual (FH1)

Control Units and additional system components

76 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.4 Control Unit CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS)

3.4.2.8 X127 LAN (Ethernet)

Table 3- 23 X127 LAN (Ethernet)

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 TXP Ethernet transmit data +
2 TXN Ethernet transmit data -
3 RXP Ethernet receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Ethernet receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
Connector type: RJ45 socket

Note
The LAN (Ethernet) interface does not support Auto MDI(X). For this reason, only crossed
cables may be used to connect devices.

For diagnostic purposes, the X127 LAN interface features a green and a yellow LED. These
LEDs indicate the following status information:

Table 3- 24 LED statuses for the X127 LAN interface

LED Color Status Description

Link port - Off Missing or faulty link
Green Continuous light 10 or 100 Mbit link available
Activity port - Off No activity
Yellow Flashing light Sending or receiving

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 77
Control Units and operating elements
3.4 Control Unit CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS)

3.4.2.9 X140 serial interface (RS232)

An external display and operator device for operator control/parameterization can be
connected via the serial interface. The interface is located on the lower side of the Control
Unit.

Table 3- 25 X140 serial interface (RS232)

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 Reserved, do not use
2 RxD Receive data
3 TxD Transmit data
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Ground Ground reference
6 Reserved, do not use
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
9 Reserved, do not use

Connector type: 9-pin SUB D connector

3.4.2.10 Measuring socket contacts

Table 3- 26 Measuring socket contacts

Socket Function Technical data

M Ground Voltage: 0… 5 V
T0 Measuring socket contact 0 Resolution: 8 bits
Load current: max. 3 mA
T1 Measuring socket contact 1 Continuous short-circuit proof
T2 Measuring socket contact 2 The reference potential is terminal M

PCB plug connector from Phoenix Contact, type: ZEC 1.0/ 4-ST-3.5 C1 R1.4, order number: 1893708

Note
Cable cross section
The measuring socket contacts are only suitable for cable cross-sections of 0.2 mm2 to
1 mm2.

Note
Using the measuring socket contacts
The measuring socket contacts support commissioning and diagnostic functions. It must not
be connected for normal operation.

Control Units and additional system components

78 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.4 Control Unit CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS)

3.4.2.11 DIAG button

The DIAG pushbutton is reserved for service functions.

3.4.2.12 Slot for memory card

Figure 3-13 Slot for memory card

WARNING
Danger to life through software manipulation when using removable storage media
The storage of files on removable storage media involves a high risk of infection, e.g. via
viruses or malware. As a result of incorrect parameterization, machines can malfunction,
which in turn can lead to injuries or death.
• Protect the files on removable storage media against malware through appropriate
protective measures, e.g. virus scanners.

Note
Possible plant standstill by withdrawing or inserting the memory card in operation
If the memory card is withdrawn or inserted during operation, then data can be lost, possibly
resulting in a plant standstill.
• Only withdraw and insert the memory card when the Control Unit is in a no-voltage
condition.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 79
Control Units and operating elements
3.4 Control Unit CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS)

Note
Insertion direction for the memory card
Only insert the memory card as shown in the photo above (arrow at top right).

NOTICE
Memory card damage caused by electric fields or electrostatic discharge
Electrical fields or electrostatic discharge may result in the memory card being damaged.
• When removing and inserting the memory card, always observe the ESD regulations
(Page 23).

Note
Possible data loss when returning the Control Unit with memory card
When returning a defective Control Unit for repair or testing, the data on the memory card
(parameters, firmware, licenses, etc.) could be lost.
• Do not return the memory card as well, but keep it in a safe place so that it can be
inserted in the replacement unit.

Note
Please note that only SIEMENS memory cards can be used to operate the Control Unit.

Control Units and additional system components

80 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.4 Control Unit CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS)

3.4.3 Connection example

Figure 3-14 Connection example of CU320-2 DP

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 81
Control Units and operating elements
3.4 Control Unit CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS)

3.4.4 Meaning of the LEDs

3.4.4.1 Description of the LED statuses

The different statuses that arise during the booting procedure are indicated by means of the
LEDs on the Control Unit.
● The duration of the individual statuses varies.
● If an error occurs, the booting procedure is terminated and the cause is indicated
accordingly via the LEDs.
● Once the unit has successfully booted up, all the LEDs are switched off briefly.
● Once the unit has booted up, the LEDs are controlled via the loaded software.

3.4.4.2 Behavior of the LEDs during booting

Table 3- 27 Load software

LED Status Comment

RDY COM OPT
Red Orange Orange Reset Hardware reset
RDY LED lights up red, all other LEDs light
up orange
Red Red Off BIOS loaded –
Red 2 Hz Red Off BIOS error • Error occurred while loading the BIOS
Red 2 Hz Red 2 Hz Off File error • Memory card not inserted or defective
• Software on memory card not present
or corrupted
Red Orange Off FW loading RDY LED lights up red, COM LED flashes
Flashing light orange without fixed frequency
Red Off Off FW loaded -
Off Red Off FW checked
(no CRC error)
Red 0.5 Red 0.5 Hz Off FW checked • CRC invalid
Hz (CRC error)

Table 3- 28 Firmware

LED Status Comment

RDY COM OPT
Orange Off Off Initializing –
Alternating Running See the table below

Control Units and additional system components

82 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.4 Control Unit CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS)

3.4.4.3 Behavior of the LEDs in the operating state

Table 3- 29 Control Unit CU320-2 DP – Description of the LEDs after booting

LED Color Status Description, cause Remedy

RDY (READY) - OFF Electronics power supply is missing or outside Check power supply
the permissible tolerance range.
Green Continuous The component is ready for operation and cyclic –
light DRIVE-CLiQ communication is taking place.
Flashing Commissioning/reset –
light
0.5 Hz
Flashing Writing to the memory card –
light
2 Hz
Red Flashing General error Check
light parameterization/configuratio
2 Hz n data
Red/ Flashing Control Unit is ready for operation. Obtain licenses
green light However, there are no software licenses.
0.5 Hz
Orange Flashing Updating the firmware of the DRIVE-CLiQ –
light components
0.5 Hz
Flashing DRIVE-CLiQ component firmware update Turn POWER ON for the
light complete. Wait for POWER ON for the components in question
2 Hz components in question.
Green/ Flashing Component detection via LED is activated –
orange light (p0124[0]).
or 2 Hz Note:
red/ Both options depend on the LED status when
orange component recognition is activated via p0124[0]
= 1.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 83
Control Units and operating elements
3.4 Control Unit CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS)

LED Color Status Description, cause Remedy

COM – Off Cyclic communication has not (yet) taken place. –
PROFIdrive Note:
cyclic The PROFIdrive is ready to communicate when
operation the Control Unit is ready to operate (see LED
RDY).
Green Continuous Cyclic communication is taking place. –
light
Flashing Full cyclic communication has not yet taken –
light place.
0.5 Hz Possible causes:
• The controller is not transferring any
setpoints.
• During isochronous operation, no global
control (GC) or a faulty global control (GC) is
transferred by the controller.
Red Flashing PROFIBUS master is sending wrong Adapt configuration between
light parameterization/configuration data master/controller and CU
0.5 Hz
Flashing Cyclic bus communication has been interrupted Remove fault
light or could not be established
2 Hz
OPT – Off Electronics power supply is missing or outside Check power supply and/or
(OPTION) the permissible tolerance range. component
Component is not ready.
Option board not installed or no associated drive
object has been created.
Green Continuous Option board is ready. –
light
Flashing Depends on the Option Board used. –
light
0.5 Hz
Red Flashing This component has at least one fault. Remove the fault and
light The Option Board is not ready (e.g. after acknowledge
2 Hz switching on).
RDY and Red Flashing Bus error - communication has been interrupted Remove fault
COM light
2 Hz
RDY and OPT Orange Flashing Firmware update in progress for connected -
light Option Board CBE20
0.5 Hz

Control Units and additional system components

84 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.4 Control Unit CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS)

3.4.5 Dimension drawing

Figure 3-15 Dimension drawing of CU320-2 DP, all data in mm and (inches)

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 85
Control Units and operating elements
3.4 Control Unit CU320-2 DP (PROFIBUS)

3.4.6 Technical data

Table 3- 30 Technical data

6SL3040-1MA00-0AA0 Unit Value

Electronics power supply
Voltage VDC 24 (20,4 … 28,8)
Current (without DRIVE-CLiQ and ADC 1,0
digital outputs)
Power loss W 24
Maximum DRIVE-CLiQ cable length m 100
PE/ground connection On the housing with M5/3 Nm screw
Response time The response time of digital inputs/outputs depends on the
evaluation (refer to the function diagram).
Additional information:
SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual (LH1),
Chapter "Function block diagrams"
Weight kg 2,3

Control Units and additional system components

86 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.5 Mounting Control Units

3.5 Mounting Control Units

3.5.1 Mounting to a Line Module

Mounting a CU320-2 Control Unit directly on a Line Module, booksize or chassis format
You must attach three support brackets to a Line Module in order to mount a Control Unit
directly on it. The support brackets are supplied in the Line Module accessories kit.

Table 3- 31 Mounting support brackets for a Control Unit onto a Line Module

1. Insert the first support bracket 2. Insert the support bracket up 3. Mount the additional support
1. into the mounting opening 2. to the end stop using a 3. brackets as described under
1. provided at the Line Module. 2. suitable tool (screwdriver). 3. Points 1 and 2.

Then mount the Control Unit onto the Line Module as shown below.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 87
Control Units and operating elements
3.5 Mounting Control Units

Table 3- 32 Installing the Control Unit on a Line Module using the CU320-2 DP as an example

1. Mount the Control Unit onto 2. Push down the Control Unit 3. The front of the mounted
1. the Line Module using the 3 2. onto the support brackets until 3. Control Unit must be flush
1. support brackets. 2. it latches into place. 3. with the Line Module.

① Opening on the Line Module Chassis for fastening the Control Unit

Figure 3-16 Mounting a Control Unit on a Line Module, chassis format

Control Units and additional system components

88 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.5 Mounting Control Units

3.5.2 Mounting on the mounting surface

Mounting a CU320-2 Control Unit directly onto a mounting surface

Mount the fixing lug of the Control Unit on the mounting surface using M6 screws.
Tightening torque: 6 Nm

Mounting a CU320-2 Control Unit to a mounting surface using spacers

To increase the mounting depth of the Control Unit to the 270 mm mounting depth of a Line
Module in the booksize format, mount spacers (2 pieces: 6SL3064-1BB00-0AA0) as shown
below to the Control Unit.
Tools required:
● Torx screwdriver T10 for the screws (M3) of the spacer

① Spacer

Figure 3-17 CU320-2 with spacers for mounting on a mounting surface

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 89
Control Units and operating elements
3.5 Mounting Control Units

3.5.3 Opening and removing the cover

Table 3- 33 Opening and lifting the cover using the CU320-2 DP as an example

Release the cover by gently pressing Swivel the cover to the front to open it. Control Unit with cover open
the release lug.

Table 3- 34 Removing the cover using a CU320-2 DP as an example

Release the cover by gently applying lateral pressure at the Swivel the cover to the side to remove it.
joint.

Control Units and additional system components

90 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.6 Basic Operator Panel BOP20

3.6 Basic Operator Panel BOP20

3.6.1 Description
The Basic Operator Panel BOP20 contains 6 keys and a backlit display unit. The BOP20 can
be plugged onto a SINAMICS Control Unit and operated.

The following functions are possible with the BOP:

● Input of parameters and activation of functions
● Display of operating modes, parameters, alarms and faults

3.6.2 Interface description

Figure 3-18 Basic Operator Panel BOP20

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 91
Control Units and operating elements
3.6 Basic Operator Panel BOP20

Overview of displays and keys

Figure 3-19 Overview of displays and keys

Table 3- 35 Displays

Display Meaning
Top left The active drive object of the BOP is displayed here.
2 positions The displays and key operations always refer to this drive object.
RUN Is lit (bright) if the displayed drive is in the RUN state (in operation).
Top right The following is displayed in this field:
2 positions
• More than 6 digits: Characters that are present but cannot be seen
(e.g. "r2" → 2 characters to the right are invisible,
"L1" → 1 character to the left is invisible)
• Faults: Selects/displays other drives with faults
• Designation of BICO inputs (bi, ci)
• Designation of BICO outputs (bo, co)
Source object of a BICO interconnection to a drive object other than the active one.
S Is (bright) if at least one parameter was changed and the value was not transferred
into the non-volatile memory.
P Is lit (bright) if, for a parameter, the value only becomes effective after pressing the
P key.
C Is light (bright) if at least one parameter was changed and the calculation for
consistent data management has still not been initiated.
Below, 6 Displays, e.g. parameters, indices, faults and alarms.
position

Control Units and additional system components

92 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.6 Basic Operator Panel BOP20

BOP20 keyboard

Table 3- 36 Assignment of the BOP20 keyboard

Key Name Meaning

ON Powering-up the drives for which the command "ON/OFF1",
"OFF2" or "OFF3" should come from the BOP.
OFF Power-down the drives for which the "ON/OFF1," "OFF2," or
"OFF3" commands should come from the BOP.
Note:
The effectiveness of these keys can be defined using the
appropriate BICO parameterization (e.g. using these keys, it is
possible to simultaneously control all of the axes that have been
configured.)
The structure of the BOP control word corresponds to the structure
of the PROFIBUS control word.
Functions The meaning of these keys depends on the actual display.
Note:
The effectiveness of this key to acknowledge faults can be defined
using the appropriate BICO parameterization.
Parameter The meaning of these keys depends on the actual display.

Raise The keys are dependent on the actual display and are used to
raise or lower values.
Lower

Display and operator controls of the BOP20

For information about display and operator controls of the BOP20, refer the SINAMICS S120
Commissioning Manual.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 93
Control Units and operating elements
3.6 Basic Operator Panel BOP20

3.6.3 Mounting at the Control Unit

NOTICE
Damage to the interface for the BOP20 at the Control Unit through tilting
If the BOP20 is skewed when inserting or withdrawing it, this can damage the interface for
the BOP20.
• Make sure that you insert and withdraw the BOP20 straight into/out of the Control Unit
and that it is not tilted up or down.

Table 3- 37 Mounting a Basic Operator Panel BOP20 using the CU320-2 DP as an example

1. Press the latching cams together and remove 2. Insert the memory card in the slot provided.
1. the blanking cover.

3. Press the latching cams on the BOP20 CU320-2 DP with BOP20 installed
3. together, and push the BOP20 straight in until
3. you hear it latch into position.

Control Units and additional system components

94 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Control Units and operating elements
3.6 Basic Operator Panel BOP20

3.6.4 Removal
Please note the following information when removing the BOP20 from the Control Unit:
1. Simultaneously press the latching cams on the BOP20.
2. Always withdraw the BOP20 straight out (without skewing it). Never withdraw the BOP20
by pulling it at its lower edge, as this could damage the interface at the rear.

Figure 3-20 Incorrect removal of the BOP20 from a CU320-2 DP (example)

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 95
Control Units and operating elements
3.6 Basic Operator Panel BOP20

Control Units and additional system components

96 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
Option boards 4
4.1 Safety instructions for option boards

WARNING
Danger to life if the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks are not carefully
observed
If the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks in Chapter 1 (Page 19) are not
observed, accidents involving severe injuries or death may occur.
• Adhere to the fundamental safety instructions.
• When assessing the risk, take into account remaining risks.

NOTICE
Damage or malfunctions to the Option Board by inserting and withdrawing in operation
Withdrawing and inserting Option Boards during operation can damage them or cause the
Option Boards to malfunction.
• Only withdraw or insert Option Boards when the Control Unit is in a current-free state.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 97
Option boards
4.2 CAN Communication Board CBC10

4.2 CAN Communication Board CBC10

4.2.1 Description
The Communication Board CAN CBC10 is a communication module for linking to the CAN
bus. The Communication Board is inserted into the option slot on a Control Unit.

4.2.2 Interface description

4.2.2.1 Overview

Figure 4-1 Interface overview of the CBC10

Control Units and additional system components

98 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Option boards
4.2 CAN Communication Board CBC10

4.2.2.2 X451 CAN bus interface

Table 4- 1 X451: CAN bus interface

Pin Designation Technical data

1 Reserved, do not use
2 CAN_L CAN signal (dominant low)
3 CAN_GND CAN ground
4 Reserved, do not use
5 CAN_SHLD Optional shield
6 GND CAN ground
7 CAN_H CAN signal
8 Reserved, do not use
9 Reserved, do not use

Type: SUB-D female, 9-pin

NOTICE
Destruction of the CAN interface due to the wrong connector
If PROFIBUS connectors are connected to CAN bus interfaces during operation, this may
lead to the CAN interfaces being destroyed.
• Do not connect PROFIBUS connectors to CAN bus interfaces.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 99
Option boards
4.2 CAN Communication Board CBC10

4.2.2.3 X452 CAN bus interface X452

Table 4- 2 X452: CAN bus interface

Pin Designation Technical data

1 Reserved, do not use
2 CAN_L CAN signal (dominant low)
3 CAN_GND CAN ground
4 Reserved, do not use
5 CAN_SHLD Optional shield
6 GND CAN ground
7 CAN_H CAN signal
8 Reserved, do not use
9 Reserved, do not use

Type: 9-pin SUB-D male

4.2.2.4 2-pin SMD DIL switch

① Switch 1
② Switch 2

Figure 4-2 2-pin SMD DIL switch 1 and 2 on the CBC10

Control Units and additional system components

100 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Option boards
4.2 CAN Communication Board CBC10

Table 4- 3 2-pin SMD DIL switch

ID on the component Switch Function Switch position Default

2 Bus terminating OFF Inactive OFF
resistor ON Active
120 Ω
1 Operation OFF Ungrounded OFF
with/without operation
ground ON Operation with
ground

4.2.3 Meaning of the LED

Table 4- 4 Meaning of the LED on the Communication Board CAN CBC10

LED Color Status Description, cause Remedy

OPT – OFF The electronics power supply is missing or outside the –
on the permissible tolerance range.
Control Unit Communication Board either defective or not inserted.
Green Continuous OPERATIONAL –
light
Flashing light PREOPERATIONAL –
No PDO communication possible
Single flash STOPPED
Only NMT communication possible
Red Continuous BUS OFF Check baud rate
light Check cabling
Single flash ERROR PASSIVE MODE Check baud rate
The error counter for "error passive" has reached the Check cabling
value 127. After the SINAMICS drive system was
booted no further active CAN component was on the
bus.
Double flash Error Control Event, a Guard Event has occurred Check connection to
CANopen master

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 101
Option boards
4.2 CAN Communication Board CBC10

4.2.4 Installation
1. Release the appropriate screws to remove the cover plate from the option slot.
2. Insert the module into the option slot of the Control Unit and fix it in place using the
screws.
Screws: M3
Tool: Torx T10 screwdriver
Tightening torque: 0.8 Nm

① Protective cover
② Option Board

Figure 4-3 Installing an Option Board using a CU320-2 DP as an example

4.2.5 Technical data

Table 4- 5 Technical data

6SL3055-0AA00-2CAx Unit Value

Max. current requirements (at 24 V DC) ADC 0,1
Power loss W <10
Weight, approx. kg 0,1

Control Units and additional system components

102 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Option boards
4.3 Communication Board Ethernet CBE20

4.3 Communication Board Ethernet CBE20

4.3.1 Description
The SINAMICS S120 system can be connected to PROFINET using the Communication
Board Ethernet CBE20 interface board. The module supports PROFINET IO with
Isochronous Realtime Ethernet (IRT) and PROFINET IO with RT.
The Communication Board has an Ethernet interface with 4 ports for communication. It is
inserted into the option slot on a Control Unit.

Note
Only one communication interface can be used in isochronous operation when operating the
Communication Board CBE20 in a Control Unit CU320-2. For the CU320-2 DP, this is either
the DP interface of the Control Unit or the PN interfaces of the CBE20.
For the CU320-2 PN, either the internal PN interfaces or the external PN interfaces of the
CBE20 are used in isochronous operation.

4.3.2 Interface description

4.3.2.1 Overview

Figure 4-4 Interface overview CBE20

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 103
Option boards
4.3 Communication Board Ethernet CBE20

4.3.2.2 X1400 Ethernet interface

Table 4- 6 X1400: Ethernet, ports 1-4

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 RXP Receive data +
2 RXN Receive data -
3 TXP Transmit data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 TXN Transmit data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
Screened M_EXT Screen, permanently
backshell connected
Connector RJ45 socket
type

For diagnostic purposes, the ports have one green and one yellow LED (refer to Meaning of
the LEDs (Page 105) for descriptions)

Cable type: Industrial Ethernet

Max. cable length: 100 m

Control Units and additional system components

104 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Option boards
4.3 Communication Board Ethernet CBE20

4.3.3 Meaning of the LEDs

Meaning of the LEDs on the CBE20 Communication Board Ethernet

Table 4- 7 Meaning of the LEDs at ports 1 to 4 of the X1400 interface

LED Color Status Description

Link port – Off The electronics power supply is missing or outside the permissible tolerance range
(link missing or defective).
Green Continuou A different device is connected to port x and a physical connection exists.
s light
Activity – Off The electronics power supply is missing or outside the permissible tolerance range
port (no activity).
Yellow Flashing Data is being received or sent at port x.
light

Table 4- 8 Meaning of the Sync and Fault LEDs on the CBE20

LED Color Status Description

Fault – Off If the link port LED is green:
The CBE20 is operating normally, data is being exchanged with the configured IO
Controller.
Red Flashing • The response monitoring interval has elapsed.
light
• Communications is interrupted.
• The IP address is incorrect.
• Incorrect or no configuration.
• Incorrect parameter settings.
• Incorrect or missing device name.
• IO Controller not connected/switched off, although an Ethernet connection has
been established.
• Other CBE20 faults
Continuou CBE20 fault error
s light
• No physical connection to a subnet/switch.
• Incorrect transmission rate
• Full duplex transmission is not activated.
Sync – Off If the link port LED is green:
The Control Unit task system is not synchronized with the IRT clock. An internal
substitute clock is generated.
Green Flashing The Control Unit task system has synchronized with the IRT clock and data is being
light exchanged.
Continuou The Task system and the MC-PLL have synchronized with the IRT clock.
s light

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 105
Option boards
4.3 Communication Board Ethernet CBE20

Table 4- 9 Meaning of the OPT LED on the Control Unit

LED Color Status Description, cause Remedy

OPT – OFF The electronics power supply is missing or outside the –
permissible tolerance range.
Communication Board either defective or not inserted.
Green Continuou Communication Board is ready and cyclic communication is –
s light taking place.
Flashing The Communication Board is ready, but cyclic –
light communications is not running.
0.5 Hz Possible causes:
• At least one fault is present.
• Communication is being established.
Red Continuou Cyclic communication via PROFINET has not yet been –
s light established. However, non-cyclic communications are
possible. SINAMICS waits for a parameterizing/configuring
telegram
Flashing The firmware update into the CBE20 has been completed –
light with an error.
0.5 Hz Possible causes:
• The CBE20 is defective.
• The memory card for the Control Unit is defective.
In this state CBE20 cannot be used.
Flashing There is a communications error between the Control Unit Correctly insert the
light and the CBE20. board, if required,
2 Hz Possible causes: replace.
• Board was withdrawn after booting.
• The board is defective
Orange Flashing Firmware is being updated. –
light
0.5 Hz

Control Units and additional system components

106 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Option boards
4.3 Communication Board Ethernet CBE20

4.3.4 Installation
1. Release the appropriate screws to remove the cover plate from the option slot.
2. Insert the module into the option slot of the Control Unit and fix it in place using the
screws.
Screws: M3
Tool: Torx T10 screwdriver
Tightening torque: 0.8 Nm

① Protective cover
② Option Board

Figure 4-5 Installing the Option Board using a CU320-2 DP as an example

4.3.5 Technical data

Table 4- 10 Technical data

Communication Board CBE20 Unit Value

6SL3055-0AA00-2EBx
Max. current requirements (at 24 V DC) ADC 0.1
Power loss W 2,4
Weight kg <0,1

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 107
Option boards
4.4 Communication Board Ethernet CBE25

4.4 Communication Board Ethernet CBE25

4.4.1 Description
The Communication Board Ethernet CBE25 interface board connects the SINAMICS S120
system with PROFINET. All PROFINET conformance classes along with the "high-
performance" application class are supported with this. This allows cycle times of up to
125 µs and a higher packing density for the frames.
The CBE25 is inserted into the option slot on a Control Unit. It has an Ethernet interface with
2 ports.

Note
Only one communication interface can be used in isochronous operation when operating the
Communication Board CBE25 in a Control Unit CU320-2. For the CU320-2 DP, this is either
the DP interface of the Control Unit or the PN interfaces of the CBE25.
For the CU320-2 PN, either the internal PN interfaces or the external PN interfaces of the
CBE25 are used in isochronous operation.

Table 4- 11 CBE20 and CBE25 compared

CBE20 CBE25
Number of Ethernet ports (RJ45) 4 2
Ethernet Controller ERTEC 400 ERTEC 200P
Minimum cycle time 250 μs 125 μs
Power loss
Typical 2.4 W 2.3 W
Maximum 4.1 W 3.5 W
Special functions PN gate, SINAMICS Link, Ethernet/IP ---
(adapter)

Control Units and additional system components

108 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Option boards
4.4 Communication Board Ethernet CBE25

4.4.2 Interface description

4.4.2.1 Overview

Figure 4-6 Interface overview CBE25

4.4.2.2 Ethernet interface

Table 4- 12 Ethernet, Port 1 (the signals are cross-connected)

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 RXP Receive data +
2 RXN Receive data -
3 TXP Transmit data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 TXN Transmit data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
Screened M_EXT Screen, permanently connected
backshell
Connector RJ45 socket
type

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 109
Option boards
4.4 Communication Board Ethernet CBE25

Table 4- 13 Ethernet, Port 2 (the signals are connected 1:1)

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
Screened M_EXT Screen, permanently connected
backshell
Connector RJ45 socket
type

For diagnostic purposes, the ports have one green and one yellow LED (refer to "Meaning of
the LEDs on the Communication Board Ethernet CBE25 (Page 111)" for descriptions)

Cable type: Industrial Ethernet

Max. cable length: 100 m

Control Units and additional system components

110 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Option boards
4.4 Communication Board Ethernet CBE25

4.4.3 Meaning of the LEDs

Meaning of the LEDs on the Communication Board Ethernet CBE25

Table 4- 14 Meaning of the LEDs on Ethernet ports 1-2

LED Color State Description

Link port – Off Electronics power supply is missing or outside the permissible tolerance range (link
missing or defective).
Green Continuou A different device is connected to port x and a physical connection exists.
s light
Activity – Off Electronics power supply is missing or outside the permissible tolerance range (no
port activity).
Yellow Flashing Data is being received or sent at port x.
light

Table 4- 15 Meaning of the Bus Sync/PN Sync and Bus Fault on the CBE25

LED Color State Description

Bus Fault – Off If the link port LED is green:
The CBE25 is operating normally, data is being exchanged with the configured IO
Controller.
Red Flashing • The response monitoring interval has elapsed.
light
• Communications is interrupted.
• The IP address is incorrect.
• Incorrect or no configuration.
• Incorrect parameter settings.
• Incorrect or missing device name.
• IO Controller not connected/switched off, although an Ethernet connection has
been established.
• Other CBE25 errors
Continuou CBE25 bus fault
s light
• No physical connection to a subnet/switch.
• Incorrect transmission rate
• Full duplex transmission is not activated.
Bus – Off If the link port LED is green:
Sync/PN The Control Unit task system is not synchronized with the IRT clock. An internal
Sync substitute clock is generated.
Green Flashing The Control Unit task system has synchronized with the IRT clock and data is being
light exchanged.
Continuou The Task system and the MC-PLL have synchronized with the IRT clock.
s light

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 111
Option boards
4.4 Communication Board Ethernet CBE25

Table 4- 16 Meaning of the OPT LED on the Control Unit

LED Color State Description, cause Remedy

OPT – OFF The electronics power supply is missing or outside the –
permissible tolerance range.
Communication Board either defective or not inserted.
Green Continuou Communication Board is ready and cyclic communication is –
s light taking place.
Flashing The Communication Board is ready, but cyclic –
light communications is not running.
0.5 Hz Possible causes:
• Communication is being established.
• At least one fault is present.
Red Continuou Cyclic communication via PROFINET has not yet been –
s light established. However, non-cyclic communications are
possible. SINAMICS waits for a parameterizing/configuring
telegram
Flashing The firmware update into the CBE25 has been completed –
light with an error.
0.5 Hz Possible causes:
• The CBE25 is defective.
• The memory card for the Control Unit is defective.
In this state the CBE25 cannot be used.
Flashing There is a communications error between the Control Unit Correctly insert the
light and the CBE25. board, if required,
2 Hz Possible causes: replace.
• The CBE25 is defective.
• The CBE25 was withdrawn after booting.
Orange Flashing Firmware is being updated. –
light
0.5 Hz

Control Units and additional system components

112 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Option boards
4.4 Communication Board Ethernet CBE25

4.4.4 Installation
1. Release the appropriate screws to remove the cover plate from the option slot.
2. Insert the module into the option slot of the Control Unit and fix it in place using the
screws.
Screws: M3
Tool: Torx T10 screwdriver
Tightening torque: 0.8 Nm

① Remove the protective cover.

② Insert the CBE25 and screw it down

Figure 4-7 Installing the CBE25 Option Board in a CU320-2 PN

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 113
Option boards
4.4 Communication Board Ethernet CBE25

4.4.5 Technical data

Table 4- 17 Technical data

Communication Board CBE25 Unit Value

6SL3055-0AA00-2FB0
Max. current requirements (at 24 V DC) ADC 0,1
Power loss
Typical W 2,3
Maximum W 3,6
Cycle time μs 125
Memory
SDRAM MB 128
Burst Mode Flash MB 32
Dimensions mm 95 x 148.1 x 25.1
Weight kg 0,112

Control Units and additional system components

114 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Option boards
4.5 Terminal Board TB30

4.5 Terminal Board TB30

4.5.1 Description
The TB30 Terminal Board is a terminal expansion module that is inserted in the option slot of
the Control Unit.
The TB30 Terminal Board has the following terminals:

Table 4- 18 Interface overview

Type Quantity
Digital inputs 4
Digital outputs 4
Analog inputs 2
Analog outputs 2

4.5.2 Interface description

4.5.2.1 Overview

Figure 4-8 Interface overview of the TB30

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 115
Option boards
4.5 Terminal Board TB30

4.5.2.2 X424 power supply, digital outputs

Table 4- 19 X424: Power supply

Terminal Designation Technical data

+ Power supply Voltage: 24 V DC (20.4 ... 28.8 V)
+ Power supply Current consumption: Max. 4 A
(per digital output max. 0.5 A)
M Ground
Max. current via jumper in connector: 20 A
M Ground (15 A according to UL/CSA)

Type: Screw terminal 2 (Page 360)

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 2.5 mm2

The maximum cable length that can be connected is 10 m.

Note
The two "+" or "M" terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures that the supply
voltage is looped through.
This power supply is required for the digital outputs only.
The electronics power supply and the power supply for the analog inputs/outputs are taken
from the option slot of the Control Unit.

Note
The power supply of the digital outputs and the electronics power supply of the Control Unit
are isolated.

Note
If the 24 V supply is briefly interrupted, then the digital outputs are deactivated during this
time.

Control Units and additional system components

116 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Option boards
4.5 Terminal Board TB30

4.5.2.3 X481 digital inputs/outputs

Table 4- 20 X481: Digital inputs/outputs

Terminal Designation1) Technical data

1 DI 0 Voltage: - 3 … 30 V
2 DI 1 Current consumption, typical: 10 mA at 24 V DC
Ground reference: X424.M
3 DI 2 Input delay:
4 DI 3 For "0" to "1": 20 μs
for "1" to "0": 100 μs
Signal level (including ripple)
High level: 15 … 30 V
Low level: -3 … 5 V
5 DO 0 Voltage: 24 V DC
6 DO 1 Max. load current per output: 500 mA
Ground reference: X424.M
7 DO 2 Continuous short-circuit proof
8 DO 3 Output delay:
For "0" to "1": typ. 150 μs at 0.5 A resistive load
(500 μs maximum)
For "1" to "0": Typically 50 μs at 0.5 A resistive load
Switching frequency:
for ohmic load: Max. 100 Hz
For inductive load: Max. 0.5 Hz
For lamp load: Max. 10 Hz
Maximum lamp load: 5 W
Type: Spring-loaded terminal 1 (Page 359)
Max. cross-section that can be connected: 0.5 mm2
1) DI: digital input, DO: digital output

Note
An open input is interpreted as "low".
The power supply and the digital inputs/outputs are isolated with respect to the Control Unit.

Note
If the 24 V supply is briefly interrupted, then the digital outputs are deactivated during this
time.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 117
Option boards
4.5 Terminal Board TB30

4.5.2.4 X482 analog inputs/outputs

Table 4- 21 X482: Analog inputs/outputs

Terminal Designation1) Technical data

1 AI 0+ Analog inputs (AI)
2 AI 0- Voltage: -10 … +10 V; Ri: 65 kΩ
3 AI 1+ Common-mode range: ±30 V
4 AI 1- Resolution: 13 bits + sign
5 AO 0+ Analog outputs (AO)
6 AO 0- Voltage range: -10 … +10 V
7 AO 1+ Load current: max. -3 … +3 mA
8 AO 1- Resolution: 11 bit + signed
Continuous short-circuit proof

Type: Spring-loaded terminal 1 (Page 359)

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 0.5 mm2
1) AI: analog input, AO: analog output

Note
Permissible voltage values
In order to avoid incorrect results of the analog-digital conversion, the analog differential
voltage signals can have a maximum offset voltage of +/-30 V with respect to ground
potential.

Note
An open input is interpreted as approximately "0 V".
The power supply of the analog inputs/outputs is taken from the option slot of the Control
Unit and not from X424.
The shield is connected to the Control Unit (see Shield support (Page 121)).

Connecting the analog inputs

The following document contains more information about analog inputs:
SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual (IH1)

Control Units and additional system components

118 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Option boards
4.5 Terminal Board TB30

4.5.3 Connection example

Figure 4-9 Example connection of TB30

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 119
Option boards
4.5 Terminal Board TB30

4.5.4 Installation
1. Release the screws and remove the protective cover from the Control Unit.
2. Place the Option Board into the slot on the Control Unit and fix it in place using the
screws.
Screws: M3
Tool: Torx T10 screwdriver
Tightening torque: 0.8 Nm

① Protective cover
② Option Board

Figure 4-10 Installing an Option Board using a CU320-2 DP as an example

Control Units and additional system components

120 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Option boards
4.5 Terminal Board TB30

4.5.5 Shield support

Figure 4-11 Shield support for TB30 on the CU320-2 DP

The permissible bending radii for the cables must not be exceeded when the cables are
being installed.

4.5.6 Technical data

Table 4- 22 Technical data

3SL3055-0AA00-2TAx Unit Value

Electronics power supply
Voltage VDC 24 (20,4 … 28,8)
Current via the option slot of the CU ADC 0,05
(without digital outputs)
Power loss W <3
Response time The response time of the digital inputs/outputs and the
analog inputs/outputs depends on the evaluation on the
Control Unit (see function diagram).
Further information:
SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual (LH1),
Chapter "Function block diagrams"
Weight kg 0,1

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 121
Option boards
4.5 Terminal Board TB30

Control Units and additional system components

122 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
Terminal Modules 5
5.1 Safety instructions for Terminal Modules

WARNING
Danger to life if the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks are not carefully
observed
If the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks in Chapter 1 (Page 19) are not
observed, accidents involving severe injuries or death may occur.
• Adhere to the fundamental safety instructions.
• When assessing the risk, take into account remaining risks.

WARNING
Risk of fire through overheating if there are insufficient ventilation clearances
Insufficient ventilation clearances lead to overheating with associated risk to persons as a
result of smoke and fire. This can also result in more downtimes and reduced service lives
of the Terminal Module.
• For this reason, it is imperative that you maintain the 50 mm clearances above and
below the Terminal Module.

NOTICE
Device failure as a result of unshielded or incorrectly routed cables to temperature sensors
Unshielded or incorrectly routed cables to temperature sensors can result in interference
being coupled into the signal processing electronics from the power side. This can result in
significant disturbance of all signals (fault messages) up to failure of individual components
(destruction of the devices).
• Only use shielded cables as temperature sensor cables.
• If temperature sensor cables are routed together with the motor cable, use separately
shielded cables twisted in pairs.
• Connect the cable shield at both ends to ground potential through a large surface area.
• Recommendation: Use suitable Motion Connect cables.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 123
Terminal Modules
5.1 Safety instructions for Terminal Modules

NOTICE
Damage through use of incorrect DRIVE-CLiQ cables
Damage or malfunctions can occur on the devices or system when incorrect or unreleased
DRIVE-CLiQ cables are used.
• Only use suitable DRIVE-CLiQ cables that have been released by Siemens for the
respective application.

Note
Malfunctions due to polluted DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces
Malfunctions can occur in the system through the use of polluted DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces.
• Cover unused DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces with the supplied blanking covers.

Note
Function equipotential bonding for distributed DRIVE-CLiQ nodes
Integrate all of the components that are connected via DRIVE-CLiQ in the functional
equipotential bonding concept. The connection should be preferably established by mounting
on metallic bare machine and plant components that are connected with one another using
an equipotential bonding conductor.
Alternatively, you can establish equipotential bonding using a conductor (min. 6 mm²), which
as far as possible, is routed in parallel to the DRIVE-CLiQ cable. This applies to all
distributed DRIVE-CLiQ nodes such as DM20, SME2x, SME12x, etc.

Control Units and additional system components

124 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.2 Terminal Module TM15

5.2 Terminal Module TM15

5.2.1 Description
The Terminal Module TM15 is a terminal expansion for snapping on to an EN 60715 DIN rail.
The TM15 can be used to increase the number of available digital inputs/outputs within a
drive system.

Table 5- 1 Interface overview of the TM15

Type Quantity
DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces 2
Bidirectional digital inputs/outputs 24
(isolation in 3 groups each with 8 DI/DO)

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 125
Terminal Modules
5.2 Terminal Module TM15

5.2.2 Interface description

5.2.2.1 Overview

Figure 5-1 TM15 interface overview

Control Units and additional system components

126 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.2 Terminal Module TM15

5.2.2.2 X500/X501 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces

Table 5- 2 X500/X501: DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) Power supply
B M (0 V) Electronics ground

The blanking covers for the DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces are included in the scope of delivery.
Blanking covers (50 x) order number: 6SL3066-4CA00-0AA0

5.2.2.3 X520 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs

Table 5- 3 X520: Digital inputs/outputs

Terminal Designation1) Technical data

1 L1+ See Chapter, Technical data
2 DI/DO 0 (Page 136).
3 DI/DO 1
4 DI/DO 2
5 DI/DO 3
6 DI/DO 4
7 DI/DO 5
8 DI/DO 6
9 DI/DO 7
10 M1 (GND)

Type: Screw terminal 1 (Page 360)

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm2
1) L1+: A 24 V DC power supply for DI/DO 0 to 7 (first potential group) must always be connected if
at least one DI/DO of the potential group is used as output.
M1: A ground reference for DI/DO 0 to 7 (first potential group) must always be connected if at least
one DI/DO of the potential group is used as either input or output.
DI/DO: bidirectional digital input/output

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 127
Terminal Modules
5.2 Terminal Module TM15

5.2.2.4 X521 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs

Table 5- 4 X521: Digital inputs/outputs

Terminal Designation1) Technical data

1 L2+ See Chapter, Technical data
2 DI/DO 8 (Page 136).
3 DI/DO 9
4 DI/DO 10
5 DI/DO 11
6 DI/DO 12
7 DI/DO 13
8 DI/DO 14
9 DI/DO 15
10 M2 (GND)

Type: Screw terminal 1 (Page 360)

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm2
1) L2+: A 24 V DC power supply for DI/DO 8 to 15 (second potential group) must always be
connected if at least one DI/DO of the potential group is used as output.
M2: A ground reference for DI/DO 8 to 15 (second potential group) must always be connected if at
least one DI/DO of the potential group is used as either input or output.
DI/DO: bidirectional digital input/output

Control Units and additional system components

128 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.2 Terminal Module TM15

5.2.2.5 X522 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs

Table 5- 5 X522: Digital inputs/outputs

Terminal Designation1) Technical data

1 L3+ See Chapter, Technical data
2 DI/DO 16 (Page 136).
3 DI/DO 17
4 DI/DO 18
5 DI/DO 19
6 DI/DO 20
7 DI/DO 21
8 DI/DO 22
9 DI/DO 23
10 M3 (GND)

Type: Screw terminal 1 (Page 360)

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm2
1) L3+: A 24 V DC power supply for DI/DO 16 to 23 (third potential group) must always be connected
if at least one DI/DO of the potential group is used as output.
M3: A ground reference for DI/DO 16 to 23 (third potential group) must always be connected if at
least one DI/DO of the potential group is used as either input or output.
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output

5.2.2.6 X524 Electronics power supply

Table 5- 6 X524: Electronics power supply

Terminal Designation Technical data

+ Electronics power supply Voltage: 24 V DC (20.4 ... 28.8 V)
+ Electronics power supply Current consumption: max. 0.15 A

M Electronics ground Max. current via jumper in connector:

20 A (15 A according to UL/CSA)
M Electronics ground

Type: Screw terminal 2 (Page 360)

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 2.5 mm²

The maximum cable length that can be connected is 10 m.

Note
The two "+" or "M" terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures that the supply
voltage is looped through.
The current consumption increases by the value for the DRIVE-CLiQ participants.
The digital outputs are supplied via terminals X520, X521 and X522.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 129
Terminal Modules
5.2 Terminal Module TM15

5.2.3 Connection example

Figure 5-2 Example connection of TM15

Control Units and additional system components

130 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.2 Terminal Module TM15

5.2.4 Meaning of the LED

Table 5- 7 Meanings of the LEDs on the Terminal Module TM15

LED Color Status Description, cause Remedy

READY - Off The electronics power supply is missing or outside the –
permissible tolerance range.
Green Continuous The component is ready for operation. Cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ –
light communication is taking place.
Orange Continuous DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established. –
light
Red Continuous This component has at least one fault. Remove and
light Note: acknowledge the
The LED is activated regardless of whether the fault.
corresponding messages have been reconfigured.
Green/re Flashing Firmware is being downloaded. –
d light 0.5 Hz
Flashing Firmware download has been completed. The system waits Carry out a POWER
light 2 Hz for POWER ON. ON.
Green/or Flashing Component recognition via LED is activated1). –
ange light Note:
or Both options depend on the LED status when component
Red/oran recognition is activated.
ge
1) See SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual for the parameters to activate the recognition of components via LED

Cause and rectification of faults

The following documents contain information about the cause of faults and how they can be
rectified:
SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual (IH1)
SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual (LH1)

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 131
Terminal Modules
5.2 Terminal Module TM15

5.2.5 Dimension drawing

Figure 5-3 Dimension drawing of Terminal Module TM15, all data in mm and (inches)

Control Units and additional system components

132 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.2 Terminal Module TM15

5.2.6 Installation

Installation
1. Tilt the component backwards slightly and attach it to the DIN rail using the hooks.
2. Swivel the component onto the DIN rail until you hear the mounting slide at the rear latch
into position.
3. Slide the components along the mounting rail to either the left or right up to their final
position.

Removal
1. First shift the mounting slide downwards at the lug to release the interlocking with the
mounting rail.
2. Swivel the component to the front and withdraw it upwards from the DIN rail.

① Mounting slide
② Mounting rail
Figure 5-4 Removing from a DIN mounting rail

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 133
Terminal Modules
5.2 Terminal Module TM15

5.2.7 Protective conductor connection and shield support

It is always advisable to shield the digital input/output wiring.
The following diagram shows a typical Weidmüller shield connection clamp for the shield
supports.

① Protective conductor connection M4 / 1.8 Nm

② Shield connection terminal, Weidmüller company, type: KLBÜ CO1, order number:
1753311001

Figure 5-5 Shield support and protective conductor connection

NOTICE
Damage or faulty operation due to incorrect shielding or inadmissible cable lengths
If the correct shielding procedures or the permissible cable lengths are not observed, it can
cause damage or the machine may malfunction.
• Only use shielded cables.
• Do not exceed the cable lengths stated in the technical data.

The TM15 housing is connected to the ground terminal of the module supply (terminal
X524). If the ground terminal is actually grounded, then the housing is also grounded. An
additional ground connection using the M4 screw is especially necessary if high potential
bonding currents can flow (e.g. through the cable shield).

Control Units and additional system components

134 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.2 Terminal Module TM15

5.2.8 Connector coding

A series of coding elements ("coding sliders") are supplied with each Terminal Module
TM15.

Connector coding
1. Insert at least one coding slider at the required position.
2. Remove the associated coding lug at the connector.

① Coding slider
② Coding lug at the connector to be removed
Figure 5-6 Connector coding using the example of interface X521

To avoid wiring errors, unique coding patterns must be defined for the connectors X520,
X521 and X522.
Possible patterns:
● 3 connectors on one component are encoded differently (i.e. X520, X521 and X522).
● Different component types are encoded differently.
● Identical components on the same machine are encoded differently, e.g. several TM15-
type components.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 135
Terminal Modules
5.2 Terminal Module TM15

5.2.9 Technical data

Table 5- 8 Technical data

6SL3055-0AA00-3FAx Unit Value

Electronics power supply
Voltage VDC 24 (20,4 … 28,8)
Current (without DRIVE-CLiQ or digital outputs) ADC 0,15
Power loss W <3
Ambient temperature up to an altitude of 2,000 m °C 0 … 60
Storage temperature °C -40 … +85
Relative humidity 5 … 95 %, no condensation
I/O
Digital inputs/outputs Can either be parameterized as DI or DO
Number of digital inputs/outputs 24
Electrical isolation Yes, in groups of 8
Max. cable length m 30
Digital inputs
Voltage VDC -30 … +30
Low-level (an open digital input is interpreted as VDC -30 … +5
"low")
High level VDC 15 … 30
Input Impedance kΩ 2,8
Current consumption (at 24 V DC) mA 11
Max. voltage in OFF state VDC 5
Current in OFF state mA 0.0 … 1.0 (per channel)
Typical input delay of the digital inputs μs "0" → "1": 50
"1" → "0": 100
Digital outputs (continued-short-circuit-proof)
Voltage VDC 24
Max. load current per digital output ADC 0,5
Output delay (ohmic load)
Typical μs "0" → "1": 50
"1" → "0": 150
Maximum μs "0" → "1": 100
"1" → "0": 225
Min. output pulse μs 125 (typ.)
(100% amplitude, 0.5 A with resistive load) 350 (max.)
Switching frequency
For resistive load Hz Max. 100
For inductive load Hz Max. 0.5
For lamp load Hz Max. 10
Maximum lamp load W 5
Max. switching frequency kHz 1 (typ.)
(100% amplitude, 50%/50% duty cycle;
with 0.5 A and a resistive load)

Control Units and additional system components

136 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.2 Terminal Module TM15

6SL3055-0AA00-3FAx Unit Value

Voltage drop in ON state VDC 0.75 (max.) for maximum load in all
circuits
Leakage current in OFF state μA Max. 10 per channel
Voltage drop, output VDC 0,5
(I/O power supply to the output)
Max. total current of outputs (per group)
up to 60°C ADC 2
up to 50°C ADC 3
up to 40°C ADC 4
Response time The response time of the digital inputs/outputs comprises the
following:
• Response time on the component itself
(approx. 1/2 DRIVE-CLiQ cycle).
• Transfer time via the DRIVE-CLiQ connection
(approx. 1 DRIVE-CLiQ cycle).
• Evaluation on the Control Unit (see function diagram)
Further information:
SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual (LH1),
Chapter "Function block diagrams"
PE/ground connection At the housing with M4/1.8 Nm screw
Weight kg 0,86
Degree of protection IP20
Approbation UL and cULus (http://www.ul.com)
File: E164110, Vol. 2, Sec. 9

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 137
Terminal Modules
5.3 Terminal Module TM31

5.3 Terminal Module TM31

5.3.1 Description
The Terminal Module TM31 is a terminal expansion that is snapped onto a EN 60715
standard mounting rail. Terminal Module TM31 can be used to increase the number of
available digital inputs/digital outputs and also the number of analog inputs/analog outputs
within a drive system.
The TM31 contains the following interfaces:

Table 5- 9 Interface overview of the TM31

Type Quantity
DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces 2
Digital inputs 8
Bidirectional digital inputs/outputs 4
Analog inputs 2
Analog outputs 2
Relay outputs 2
Temperature sensor input 1

Control Units and additional system components

138 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.3 Terminal Module TM31

5.3.2 Interface description

5.3.2.1 Overview

Figure 5-7 Interface overview TM31

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 139
Terminal Modules
5.3 Terminal Module TM31

5.3.2.2 X500/X501 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces

Table 5- 10 X500/X501: DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) Power supply
B M (0 V) Electronics ground

The blanking covers for the DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces are included in the scope of delivery.
Blanking covers (50 x) order number: 6SL3066-4CA00-0AA0

5.3.2.3 X520 digital inputs

Table 5- 11 X520: Digital inputs

Terminal Designation 1) Technical data

1 DI 0 Voltage: - 3 … +30 V
2 DI 1 Current consumption Typical: 10 mA at 24 V DC
3 DI 2 Input delay:
for "0" to "1": Typ. 50 µs max. 100 µs
4 DI 3 for "1" to "0": Typ. 130 µs, max. 150 µs
5 M1 Electrical isolation:
6 M Reference potential is terminal M1
Signal level (including ripple)
High level: 15 … 30 V
Low level: -3 … +5 V
Type: Screw terminal 1 (Page 360)
Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm²
1) DI: Digital input; M: Electronics ground; M1: Ground reference

Control Units and additional system components

140 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.3 Terminal Module TM31

Note
Ensuring the function of digital inputs
An open input is interpreted as "low".
Terminal M1 must be connected so that the digital inputs (DI) can function.
This is achieved by using one of the following measures:
1. Providing the ground reference of the digital inputs
2. A jumper to terminal M (Please observe: This removes the electrical isolation for these
digital inputs.)

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 141
Terminal Modules
5.3 Terminal Module TM31

5.3.2.4 X521 analog inputs

Table 5- 12 X521: Analog inputs

Terminal Designation1) Technical data

1 AI 0+ The analog inputs can be toggled between
2 AI 0- current and voltage input using switches S5.0
and S5.1.
3 AI 1+
As voltage input:
4 AI 1- -10 ... +10 V; Ri > 100 kΩ
Resolution: 11 bits + sign
As current input:
-20 ... +20 mA; Ri = 250 kΩ
Resolution: 10 bits + sign
5 P10 Auxiliary voltage:
6 M P10 = 10 V
N10 = -10 V
7 N10
Continuously short-circuit proof
8 M
Type: Screw terminal 1 (Page 360)
Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm²
1) AI: analog inputs; P10/N10: auxiliary voltage; M or GND: ground reference

NOTICE
Damage or malfunctions through impermissible voltage values
If a current exceeding ±35 mA flows through the analog current input, then the component
could be destroyed.
The common mode range must not be violated in order to avoid incorrect analog-digital
conversion results.
• The input voltage may only be in the range between -30 V and +30 V (destruction limit).
• The common mode voltage may only be in the range between -10 V and +10 V (error
limit).
• The back EMF at the auxiliary voltage connections may only be in the range between -
15 V and +15 V.

Note
The power supply for the analog inputs can be taken internally or from an external power
supply unit

Control Units and additional system components

142 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.3 Terminal Module TM31

5.3.2.5 S5 current/voltage changeover switch for analog inputs

Table 5- 13 Current/voltage selector S5

Switch Function
S5.0 Selector voltage (V)/current (I) Al0
S5.1 Selector voltage (V)/current (I) Al1

5.3.2.6 X522 analog outputs/temperature sensor

Table 5- 14 X522: Analog outputs/temperature sensor

Terminal Designation1) Technical data

1 AO 0V+ You can set the following output signals using parameters:
2 AO 0- Voltage: -10 … +10 V (max. 3 mA)
3 AO 0C+ Current 1: 4 … 20 mA (max. load resistance ≤ 500 Ω)
Current 2: -20 … +20 mA (max. load resistance ≤ 500 Ω)
4 AO 1V+
Current 3: 0 … 20 mA (max. load resistance ≤ 500 Ω)
5 AO 1-
Resolution: 11 bits + sign
6 AO 1C+
Continuously short-circuit proof
7 + Temp Temperature sensor KTY84-1C130/PTC
8 - Temp Measuring current via temperature sensor connection: 2 mA

Type: Screw terminal 1 (Page 360)

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm²
1) AO xV: analog output voltage; AO xC: analog output current

NOTICE
Damage or malfunctions through impermissible voltage values
If the back EMF is impermissible then damage and malfunctions may occur on the
components.
• The back EMF at the outputs may only be in the range between -15 V and +15 V.

NOTICE
Damage to motor in the event of incorrectly connected KTY temperature sensor
A KTY temperature sensor connected with incorrect polarity cannot detect if the motor
overheats. Overheating can cause damage to the motor.
• Connect a KTY temperature sensor with the correct polarity.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 143
Terminal Modules
5.3 Terminal Module TM31

WARNING
Danger to life due to electric shock in the event of voltage flashovers at the temperature
sensor
Voltage flashovers in the signal electronics can occur in motors without safe electrical
separation of the temperature sensors.
• Use temperature sensors that fully comply with the specifications of the safety isolation.
• If safe electrical separation cannot be guaranteed (for linear motors or third-party
motors, for example), use a Sensor Module External (SME120 or SME125) or Terminal
Module TM120.

5.3.2.7 X524 Electronics power supply

Table 5- 15 X524: Electronics power supply

Terminal Designation Technical data

+ Electronics power supply Voltage: 24 V DC (20.4 ... 28.8 V)
+ Electronics power supply Current consumption: max. 0.5 A

M Electronics ground
Max. current via jumper in connector:
M Electronics ground 20 A (15 A according to UL/CSA)

Type: Screw terminal 2 (Page 360)

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 2.5 mm²

The maximum cable length that can be connected is 10 m.

Note
The two "+" or "M" terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures that the supply
voltage is looped through.
The current consumption increases by the value for the DRIVE-CLiQ node and digital
outputs.

Control Units and additional system components

144 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.3 Terminal Module TM31

5.3.2.8 X530 digital inputs

Table 5- 16 X530: Digital inputs

Terminal Designation1) Technical data

1 DI 4 Voltage: -3 … +30 V
2 DI 5 Current consumption Typical: 10 mA at 24 V DC

3 DI 6 Input delay:
for "0" to "1": Typ. 50 µs max. 100 µs
4 DI 7 for "1" to "0": typ. 130 µs, max. 150 µs
5 M2 Electrical isolation:
6 M Reference potential is terminal M2
Signal level (including ripple):
High signal level: 15 … 30 V
Low level: -3 … +5 V
Type: Screw terminal 1 (Page 360)
Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm²
1) DI: digital input; M: electronics ground; M2: ground reference

Note
Ensuring the function of digital inputs
An open input is interpreted as "low".
To enable the digital inputs (DI) to function, terminal M2 must be connected.
This is achieved by using one of the following measures:
1. Providing the ground reference of the digital inputs
2. A jumper to terminal M (Please observe: This removes the electrical isolation for these
digital inputs.)

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 145
Terminal Modules
5.3 Terminal Module TM31

5.3.2.9 X540 auxiliary voltage for the digital inputs

Table 5- 17 X540: Auxiliary voltage for digital inputs

Terminal Designation Technical data

8 +24 V Voltage: +24 V DC
7 +24 V Max. total load current of +24 V
6 +24 V auxiliary voltage for terminals X540
and X541 combined: 150 mA
5 +24 V
4 +24 V
3 +24 V
2 +24 V
1 +24 V

Type: Screw terminal 1 (Page 360)

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm²

Note
This voltage supply is only for powering the digital inputs.

Control Units and additional system components

146 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.3 Terminal Module TM31

5.3.2.10 X541 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs

Table 5- 18 X541: Bidirectional digital inputs/outputs

Terminal Designation1) Technical data

6 M Auxiliary voltage:
5 DI/DO 11 Voltage: +24 V DC
Max. total load current of +24 V auxiliary voltage of terminals
4 DI/DO 10 X540 and X541 combined: 150 mA
3 DI/DO 9 As input:
2 DI/DO 8 Voltage: -3 … 30 V
1 +24 V Current consumption, typical: 10 mA at 24 V
Input delay:
for "0" to "1": Typ. 50 μs
for "1" to "0". Typ. 100 μs
As output:
Voltage: 24 V DC
Max. load current per output: 500 mA
Max. total current of outputs (including currents to the inputs):
100 mA / 1 A (can be parameterized)
Continuously short-circuit proof
Output delay:
for "0" to "1": typ. 150 μs at 0.5 A resistive load (500 μs
maximum)
for "1" to "0": Typically 50 μs at 0.5 A resistive load
Switching frequency:
for ohmic load: Max. 100 Hz
For inductive load: Max. 0.5 Hz
For lamp load: Max. 10 Hz
Maximum lamp load: 5 W
Type: Screw terminal 1 (Page 360)
Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm²
1) DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output; M: Electronics ground

Note
An open input is interpreted as "low".

Note
If the 24 V supply is briefly interrupted, then the digital outputs are deactivated during this
time.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 147
Terminal Modules
5.3 Terminal Module TM31

5.3.2.11 X542 relay outputs

Table 5- 19 X542: Relay outputs

Terminal Designation1) Technical data

1 DO 0.NC Contact type: Two-way contact max. load current: 8 A
2 DO 0.COM Max. switching voltage: 250 VAC, 30 VDC
Max. switching power at 250 VAC: 2000 VA (cosϕ = 1)
3 DO 0.NO Max. switching power at 250 VAC: 750 VA (cosϕ = 0.4)
4 DO 1.NC Max. switching power at 30 VDC: 240 W (resistive load)
5 DO 1.COM Required minimum current: 100 mA
Output delay: ≤ 20 ms 2)
6 DO 1.NO
Overvoltage category: Class II acc. to EN 60664-1

Type: Screw terminal 3 (Page 360)

Maximum connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm2
Maximum switching frequency at full load: 6 rpm
1) DO: digital output, NO: normally-open contact, NC: normally-closed contact, COM: mid-position contact
2) Depending on the parameterization and the supply voltage (P24) of the TM31

Control Units and additional system components

148 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.3 Terminal Module TM31

5.3.3 Connection example

Figure 5-8 Connection example of TM31

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 149
Terminal Modules
5.3 Terminal Module TM31

5.3.4 Meaning of the LED

Table 5- 20 Meanings of the LEDs on the Terminal Module TM31

LED Color Status Description, cause Remedy

READY - Off The electronics power supply is missing or outside the –
permissible tolerance range.
Green Continuous The component is ready for operation. Cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ –
light communication is taking place.
Orange Continuous DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established. –
light
Red Continuous This component has at least one fault. Remove and
light Note: acknowledge the fault.
The LED is activated regardless of whether the
corresponding messages have been reconfigured.
Green/re Flashing Firmware is being downloaded. –
d light 0.5 Hz
Flashing Firmware download has been completed. The system Carry out a POWER
light 2 Hz waits for POWER ON. ON.
Green/ Flashing Component recognition via LED is activated1). –
orange light Note:
or Both options depend on the LED status when component
Red/ recognition is activated via p0154 = 1.
orange
1) See SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual for the parameters to activate the recognition of components via LED

Cause and rectification of faults

The following documents contain information about the cause of faults and how they can be
rectified:
SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual (IH1)
SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual (LH1)

Control Units and additional system components

150 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.3 Terminal Module TM31

5.3.5 Dimension drawing

Figure 5-9 Dimension drawing of Terminal Module TM31, all data in mm and (inches)

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 151
Terminal Modules
5.3 Terminal Module TM31

5.3.6 Installation

Installation
1. Tilt the component backwards slightly and attach it to the DIN rail using the hooks.
2. Swivel the component onto the DIN rail until you hear the mounting slide at the rear latch
into position.
3. Slide the components along the mounting rail to either the left or right up to their final
position.

Removal
1. First shift the mounting slide downwards at the lug to release the interlocking with the
mounting rail.
2. Swivel the component to the front and withdraw it upwards from the DIN rail.

① Mounting slide
② Mounting rail
Figure 5-10 Removing from a DIN mounting rail

Control Units and additional system components

152 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.3 Terminal Module TM31

5.3.7 Protective conductor connection and shield support

It is always advisable to shield the digital input/output wiring.
The following diagram shows a typical Weidmüller shield connection clamp for the shield
supports.

① Protective conductor connection M4 / 1.8 Nm

② Shield connection terminal, Weidmüller company, type: KLBÜ CO1, order number:
1753311001

Figure 5-11 Shield support and protective conductor connection

NOTICE
Damage or faulty operation due to incorrect shielding or inadmissible cable lengths
If the correct shielding procedures or the permissible cable lengths are not observed, it can
cause damage or the machine may malfunction.
• Only use shielded cables.
• Do not exceed the cable lengths stated in the technical data.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 153
Terminal Modules
5.3 Terminal Module TM31

5.3.8 Connector coding

To ensure that identical connectors are assigned correctly on the TM31, the connecters are
encoded as shown in the following diagram.

Figure 5-12 Example of connector coding at the TM31

The bending radii of the cables must be taken into account (see description of MOTION-
CONNECT).

Control Units and additional system components

154 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.3 Terminal Module TM31

5.3.9 Technical data

Table 5- 21 Technical data

6SL3055-0AA00-3AAx Unit Value

Electronics power supply
Voltage VDC 24 (20,4 … 28,8)
Current (without DRIVE-CLiQ ADC 0,5
and digital outputs)
Power loss W < 10
Response time The response time of the digital inputs/outputs and the
analog inputs/outputs comprise the following:
• Response time on the component itself
(approx. 1/2 DRIVE-CLiQ cycle).
• Transfer time via the DRIVE-CLiQ connection
(approx. 1 DRIVE-CLiQ cycle).
• Evaluation on the Control Unit (see function diagram).
Additional information: SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual
(LH1),Chapter "Function block diagrams"
PE/ground connection At the housing with M4/1.8 Nm screw
Weight kg 1
Degree of protection IP20

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 155
Terminal Modules
5.4 Terminal Module TM41

5.4 Terminal Module TM41

5.4.1 Description
The Terminal Module TM41 is an expansion module that is snapped onto an EN 60715
standard mounting rail.
The encoder interface of the TM41 can be used to emulate an incremental encoder. The
TM41 can also be used to connect analog controls to SINAMICS.
The TM41 contains the following interfaces:

Table 5- 22 Interface overview of the TM41

Type Quantity
DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces 2
Digital inputs, floating 4
Bidirectional digital inputs/outputs 4
Analog inputs 1
TTL encoder output 1

Control Units and additional system components

156 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.4 Terminal Module TM41

5.4.2 Interface description

5.4.2.1 Overview

Figure 5-13 TM41 interface overview

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 157
Terminal Modules
5.4 Terminal Module TM41

5.4.2.2 X500/X501 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces

Table 5- 23 X500/X501: DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) Power supply
B M (0 V) Electronics ground

The blanking covers for the DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces are included in the scope of delivery.
Blanking covers (50 x) order number: 6SL3066-4CA00-0AA0

5.4.2.3 X514 and X524 Power supply

The X514 interface supplies the X521 interface with current.
The X524 interface provides the electronics power supply.

Table 5- 24 X514/X524: Power supply

Terminal Designation Technical data

+ Power supply Voltage: 24 V DC (20.4 ... 28.8 V)
+ Power supply Current consumption: max. 0.5 A
M Electronics ground
Max. current via jumper in connector:
M Electronics ground 20 A (15 A according to UL/CSA)

Type: Screw terminal 2 (Page 360)

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 2.5 mm²

The maximum cable length that can be connected is 10 m.

Note
The two "+" or "M" terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures that the supply
voltage is looped through.
The current drain of X524 increases by the value for the DRIVE-CLiQ node.
The current drain of X514 increases by the value for the digital outputs.

Control Units and additional system components

158 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.4 Terminal Module TM41

5.4.2.4 X520 encoder interface

Table 5- 25 X520: Encoder interface

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 A Incremental signal A
2 R Reference signal R
3 B Incremental signal B
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 A* Inverse incremental signal A
7 R* Inverse reference signal R
8 B* Inverse incremental signal B
9 M Ground

Connector 9-pin SUB-D socket; TTL encoder (RS422)

type:
Max. cable length: 100 m

Note
The X520 encoder interface produces signals acc. to RS422 standard.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 159
Terminal Modules
5.4 Terminal Module TM41

5.4.2.5 X521 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs

Table 5- 26 X521: Digital inputs/outputs

Terminal Designation1) Technical data

1 DI/DO 0 As input:
2 DI/DO 1 Voltage: -3 … 30 V DC
Current consumption, typical: 10 mA at 24 V
3 DI/DO 2
Signal level (incl. ripple)
4 DI/DO 3 High level: 15 … 30 V
Low level: -3 … +5 V
Input delay:
for "0" → "1": typ. 50 µs max. 100 µs
for "1" → "0": typ. 50 µs, max. 100 µs
As output:
Voltage: 24 V DC
Max. load current per output: 0.5 mA
Max. total current of outputs: 2 A
Continuously short-circuit proof
Output delay:
for "0" → "1": typ. 150 μs at 0.5 A resistive load
(500 μs maximum)
for "1" → "0": Typically 150 μs at 0.5 A resistive load
Switching frequency:
for ohmic load: Max. 100 Hz
For inductive load: Max. 0.5 Hz
For lamp load: Max. 10 Hz
Maximum lamp load: 5 W
5 +24 V Voltage: 24 V DC
6 +24 V Max. total load current of +24 V auxiliary voltage of
terminals 5 up to 8 combined: 500 mA
7 +24 V
8 +24 V
Type: Screw terminal 1 (Page 360)
Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm²
1) DI/DO: bidirectional digital input/output

Note
This power supply is only for supplying the digital inputs.

Note
An open input is interpreted as "low".

Note
If the 24 V supply is briefly interrupted, then the digital outputs are deactivated during this
time.

Control Units and additional system components

160 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.4 Terminal Module TM41

5.4.2.6 X522 isolated digital inputs

Table 5- 27 X522: Digital inputs

Terminal Designation1) Technical data

1 DI 0 Voltage: -3 … +30 V DC
2 DI 1 Current consumption, typical: 6.5 mA at 24 V

3 DI 2 Electrical isolation:
Reference potential is terminal M1
4 DI 3
Signal level (including ripple)
5 M1 High level: 15 … 30 V
6 M Low level: -3 … +5 V
Input delay:
for "0" → "1": typ. 50 µs max. 100 µs
- for "1" → "0": typ. 110 µs, max. 150 µs
Type: Screw terminal 1 (Page 360)
Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm²
1) DI: Digital input; M: Electronics ground; M1: Ground reference

Note
Ensuring the function of digital inputs
Terminal M1 must be connected so that the digital inputs (DI) can function.
This is achieved by using one of the following measures:
1. Providing the ground reference of the digital inputs
2. A jumper to terminal M (Please observe: This removes the electrical isolation for these
digital inputs.)

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 161
Terminal Modules
5.4 Terminal Module TM41

5.4.2.7 X523 analog input

Table 5- 28 X523: Analog input

Terminal Designation1) Technical data

1 AI 0- Voltage: -10 … +10 V;
2 AI 0+ Ri > 100 kΩ
Resolution: 12 bits + sign
3 Reserved, do not use

Type: Screw terminal 1 (Page 360)

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm²
1) AI: analog input

Note
Permissible voltage values
The common mode range must not be violated in order to avoid incorrect analog-digital
conversion results. The following voltages are permissible:
• Input voltage: ±30 V (destruction limit)
• Common mode voltage: ±10 V (increased errors when exceeded)

Control Units and additional system components

162 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.4 Terminal Module TM41

5.4.3 Connection example

Figure 5-14 Sample connection of TM41

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 163
Terminal Modules
5.4 Terminal Module TM41

5.4.4 Meaning of the LEDs

Table 5- 29 Meaning of the LEDs on the Terminal Module TM41

LED Color Status Description, cause Remedy

READY - Off The electronics power supply is missing or outside the –
permissible tolerance range.
Green Continuous The component is ready for operation. Cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ –
light communication is taking place.
Orange Continuous DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established. –
light
Red Continuous This component has at least one fault. Remove and
light Note: acknowledge the fault.
The LED is activated regardless of whether the
corresponding messages have been reconfigured.
Green/re Flashing Firmware is being downloaded. –
d light 0.5 Hz
Flashing Firmware download has been completed. The system Carry out a POWER
light 2 Hz waits for POWER ON. ON.
Green/or Flashing Component recognition via LED is activated1). –
ange light Note:
or Both options depend on the LED status when component
Red/oran recognition is activated.
ge
Z pulses – Off The zero mark was found and the system waits for the –
zero mark output.
OR
The component is switched off.
Red Continuous The zero mark has not been released, or the zero mark –
light search is running.
Green Continuous The system stops at the zero mark. –
light
Flashing The zero mark is output at each virtual revolution. –
light
1) See SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual for the parameters to activate the recognition of components via LED

Cause and rectification of faults

The following documents contain information about the cause of faults and how they can be
rectified:
SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual (IH1)
SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual (LH1)

Control Units and additional system components

164 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.4 Terminal Module TM41

5.4.5 Dimension drawing

Figure 5-15 Dimension drawing of Terminal Module TM41, all data in mm and (inches)

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 165
Terminal Modules
5.4 Terminal Module TM41

5.4.6 Installation

Installation
1. Tilt the component backwards slightly and attach it to the DIN rail using the hooks.
2. Swivel the component onto the DIN rail until you hear the mounting slide at the rear latch
into position.
3. Slide the components along the mounting rail to either the left or right up to their final
position.

Removal
1. First shift the mounting slide downwards at the lug to release the interlocking with the
mounting rail.
2. Swivel the component to the front and withdraw it upwards from the DIN rail.

① Mounting slide
② Mounting rail
Figure 5-16 Removing from a DIN mounting rail

Control Units and additional system components

166 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.4 Terminal Module TM41

5.4.7 Protective conductor connection and shield support

It is always advisable to shield the digital input/output wiring.
The following diagram shows a typical Weidmüller shield connection clamp for the shield
supports.

① Protective conductor connection M4 / 1.8 Nm

② Shield connection terminal, Weidmüller company, type: KLBÜ CO1, order number:
1753311001

Figure 5-17 Shield support and protective conductor connection

The bending radii of the cables must be taken into account (see description of MOTION-
CONNECT).

NOTICE
Damage or faulty operation due to incorrect shielding or inadmissible cable lengths
If the correct shielding procedures or the permissible cable lengths are not observed, it can
cause damage or the machine may malfunction.
• Only use shielded cables.
• Do not exceed the cable lengths stated in the technical data.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 167
Terminal Modules
5.4 Terminal Module TM41

5.4.8 Technical data

Table 5- 30 Technical data

6SL3055-0AA00-3PAx Unit Value

Electronics power supply
Voltage VDC 24 (20,4 … 28,8)
Current (without DRIVE-CLiQ and ADC 0,5
digital outputs)
Power loss W 12
Response time The response time of the digital inputs/outputs and the analog
input comprise the following:
• Response time on the component itself
(approx. 1/2 DRIVE-CLiQ cycle).
• Transfer time via the DRIVE-CLiQ connection
(approx. 1 DRIVE-CLiQ cycle).
• Evaluation on the Control Unit (see function diagram).
Additional information: SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual
(LH1),Chapter "Function block diagrams"
PE/ground connection At the housing with M4/1.8 Nm screw
Weight kg 0,85
Degree of protection IP20

Control Units and additional system components

168 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.5 Terminal Module TM54F

5.5 Terminal Module TM54F

5.5.1 Description
The Terminal Module TM54F is a terminal expansion for snapping on to an EN 60715
standard mounting rail. The TM54F has fail-safe digital inputs and digital outputs for
controlling SINAMICS Safety Integrated functions.
The TM54F connection should be established via the DRIVE-CLiQ directly at a Control Unit.
Only one TM54F can be assigned to each Control Unit.
Additional DRIVE-CLiQ nodes can be operated at the TM54F, such as Sensor Modules and
Terminal Modules (excluding an additional TM54F). Motor Modules and Line Modules should
not be connected to a TM54F.
TM54F features the following interfaces:

Table 5- 31 Interface overview of the TM54F

Type Quantity
DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces 2
Fail-safe digital outputs (F-DO) 4
Fail-safe digital inputs (F-DI) 10
Sensor1) power supplies, dynamization supported 2) 2
Sensor1) power supply, no dynamization 1
Digital inputs to check F_DO for a test stop 4
1) Sensors: Fail-safe devices to issue commands and sense, for example, Emergency Stop
pushbuttons and safety locks, position switches and light arrays/light curtains.
2) Dynamic response: The sensor power supply is cycled on and off by the TM54F when the forced
checking procedure is active for the sensors, cable routing, and the evaluation electronics.

The TM54F has 4 fail-safe digital outputs and 10 fail-safe digital inputs. A fail-safe digital
output consists of a 24 V DC switching output, a ground switching output, and a digital input
for checking the switching state. A fail-safe digital input is made up of 2 digital inputs.

Note
The rated values of the F-DO meet the requirements of EN 61131-2 for digital DC outputs
with 0.5 A rated current.
The operating ranges of the F-DI meet the requirements of EN 61131-2 for Type 1 digital
inputs.

Note
For cable lengths > 30 m, shielded cables must be used for the F-DI.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 169
Terminal Modules
5.5 Terminal Module TM54F

5.5.2 Interface description

5.5.2.1 Overview

Figure 5-18 TM54 interface overview

Control Units and additional system components

170 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.5 Terminal Module TM54F

5.5.2.2 X500/X501 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces

Table 5- 32 X500/X501: DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) Power supply
B M (0 V) Electronics ground

The blanking covers for the DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces are included in the scope of delivery.
Blanking covers (50 x) order number: 6SL3066-4CA00-0AA0

5.5.2.3 X514 power supply for digital outputs and sensors

Table 5- 33 X514: Power supply

Terminal Designation Technical data

+ Power supply Voltage: 24 V DC (20.4 ... 28.8 V)
+ Power supply Current consumption: max. 4 A 1)
M1 Electronics ground Max. current via jumper in connector:
20 A (15 A according to UL/CSA)
M1 Electronics ground

Type: Screw terminal 2 (Page 360)

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 2.5 mm²
1) Including the current consumption for the digital outputs and to supply the sensor.

The maximum cable length that can be connected is 10 m.

Note
The two "+" or "M1" terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures that the supply
voltage is looped through.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 171
Terminal Modules
5.5 Terminal Module TM54F

5.5.2.4 X520 sensor power supply

Table 5- 34 X520: Sensor power supply

Terminal Designation Technical data

1 L3 Voltage: +24 V DC
Max. total load current: 500 mA
2 M1

Without forced dormant error detection

5.5.2.5 X521 fail-safe digital inputs + power supply with forced dormant error detection

Table 5- 35 X521: Fail-safe digital inputs

Terminal Designation1) Technical data

1 L1+ Switched voltage: +24 V DC
Max. total load current: 500 mA
(voltage is switched for a test stop)
2 DI 0 F-DI 0 Voltage: -3 … +30 V DC
3 DI 1+ Current consumption typical: 3.2 mA at 24 V
4 DI 2 F-DI 1 Electrical isolation:
5 DI 3+ Reference potential, see terminal 6, 7, 8
All digital inputs are isolated.
Signal level (including ripple)
High level: 15 … 30 V
Low level: -3 … +5 V
Input delay: 2)
for "0" → "1": 30 μs (100 Hz)
for "1" → "0": 60 μs (100 Hz)
6 DI 1- F-DI 0 Reference potential for DI 1+
7 DI 3- F-DI 1 Reference potential for DI 3+
8 M1 Reference potential for DI 0, DI 2, L1+
An F-DI comprises a digital input and a 2nd digital input where, in addition, the cathode of the optocoupler is fed-out.
F-DI 0 = terminals 2, 3 and 6
F-DI 1 = terminals 4, 5 and 7
Type: Screw terminal 1 (Page 360)
Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm²
1) DI: Digital input, F-DI: Fail-safe digital input
2) Pure hardware delay

Note
Execution of a test stop
The test stop of the F-DI 0 to F-DI 4 can only be performed if the F-DI is supplied from L1+.

Control Units and additional system components

172 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.5 Terminal Module TM54F

Note
Ensuring the function of digital inputs
For the digital inputs DIx+ to function, the reference potential must be connected to input
DIx- in each case.
This is achieved by using one of the following measures:
1. Providing the ground reference of the digital inputs
2. A jumper between DIx- and terminal M1

5.5.2.6 X522 fail-safe digital inputs

Table 5- 36 X522: Fail-safe digital inputs

Terminal Designation1) Technical data

1 DI 4 F-DI 2 Voltage: -3 … +30 V DC
2 DI 5+ Current consumption typical: 3.2 mA at 24 V
3 DI 6 F-DI 3 Electrical isolation:
Reference potential, see terminals 7, 8, 9, 10
4 DI 7+
All digital inputs are isolated.
5 DI 8 F-DI 4
Signal level (including ripple)
6 DI 9+ High level: 15 … 30 V
Low level: -3 … +5 V
Input delay: 2)
for "0" → "1": 30 μs (100 Hz)
for "1" → "0": 60 μs (100 Hz)
7 DI 5- F-DI 2 Reference potential for DI 5+
8 DI 7- F-DI 3 Reference potential for DI 7+
9 DI 9- F-DI 4 Reference potential for DI 9+
10 M1 Reference potential for DI 4, DI 6 and DI 8
An F-DI comprises a digital input and a 2nd digital input where, in addition, the cathode of the optocoupler is fed-out.
F-DI 2 = terminals 1, 2 and 7
F-DI 3 = terminals 3, 4 and 8
F-DI 4 = terminals 5, 6 and 9
Type: Screw terminal 1 (Page 360)
Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm²
1) DI: Digital input, F-DI: Fail-safe digital input
2) Pure hardware delay

Note
Execution of a test stop
The test stop of the F-DI 0 to F-DI 4 can only be performed if the F-DI is supplied from L1+.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 173
Terminal Modules
5.5 Terminal Module TM54F

Note
Ensuring the function of digital inputs
For the digital inputs DIx+ to function, the reference potential must be connected to input
DIx- in each case.
This is achieved by using one of the following measures:
1. Providing the ground reference of the digital inputs
2. A jumper between DIx- and terminal M1

5.5.2.7 X523 fail-safe digital output

Table 5- 37 X523: Fail-safe digital output

Terminal Designation1) Technical data

1 DI 20 Voltage: -3 … +30 V DC
Current consumption typical: 3.2 mA at 24 V
Electrical isolation: Reference potential is terminal M1.
The digital input is electrically isolated.
Signal level (including ripple)
High level: 15 … 30 V
Low level: -3 … +5 V
Input delay:2)
for "0" → "1": 30 μs (100 Hz)
F-DO 0 for "1" → "0": 60 μs (100 Hz)
2 DO 0+ 0.5 A (reference potential is terminal M1)
3 DO 0- 0.5 A (reference potential is terminal L1+, L2+ or L3+)
Output delay:2)
for "0" → "1": 300 μs
for "1" → "0": 350 µs
Current consumption In total all DOs: 2 A
Max. leakage current: < 0.5 mA
Switching frequency:
for ohmic load: Max. 100 Hz
For inductive load: Max. 0.5 Hz
For lamp load: Max. 10 Hz
Maximum lamp load: 5 W
An F-DO comprises two digital outputs and one digital input for feedback
F-DO 0 = terminals 1, 2, and 3
Type: Screw terminal 1 (Page 360)
Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm²
1) DI: Digital input; DO: digital output F-DO: Fail-safe digital output
2) Pure hardware delay

Control Units and additional system components

174 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.5 Terminal Module TM54F

5.5.2.8 X524 electronics power supply

Table 5- 38 X524: Electronics power supply

Terminal Designation Technical data

+ Electronics power supply Voltage: 24 V DC (20.4 ... 28.8 V)
+ Electronics power supply Current consumption: max. 0.7 A
M Electronics ground Max. current via jumper in connector:
20 A (15 A according to UL/CSA)
M Electronics ground

Type: Screw terminal 2 (Page 360)

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 2.5 mm²

The maximum cable length that can be connected is 10 m.

Note
The two "+" or "M" terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures that the supply
voltage is looped through.
The current consumption increases by the value for the DRIVE-CLiQ node.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 175
Terminal Modules
5.5 Terminal Module TM54F

5.5.2.9 X525 fail-safe digital output

Table 5- 39 X525: Fail-safe digital output

Terminal Designation1) Technical data

1 DI 21 Voltage: -3 … +30 V DC
Current consumption typical: 3.2 mA at 24 V
Electrical isolation: Reference potential is terminal M1.
The digital input is electrically isolated.
Signal level (including ripple)
High level: 15 … 30 V
Low level: -3 … +5 V
Input delay:2)
for "0" → "1": 30 μs (100 Hz)
F-DO 1 for "1" → "0": 60 μs (100 Hz)
2 DO 1+ 0.5 A (reference potential is terminal M1)
3 DO 1- 0.5 A (reference potential is terminal L1+, L2+ or L3+)
Output delay:2)
for "0" → "1": 300 μs
for "1" → "0": 350 µs
Current consumption In total all DOs: 2 A
Max. leakage current: < 0.5 mA
Switching frequency:
for ohmic load: Max. 100 Hz
for inductive load: Max. 0.5 Hz
for lamp load: Max. 10 Hz
Maximum lamp load: 5 W
An F-DO comprises 2 digital outputs and 1 digital input for feedback signal
F-DO 1 = terminals 1, 2, and 3
Type: Screw terminal 1 (Page 360)
Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm²
1) DI: Digital input; DO: Digital output F-DO: Fail-safe digital output
2) Pure hardware delay

Control Units and additional system components

176 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.5 Terminal Module TM54F

5.5.2.10 X531 fail-safe digital inputs + power supply with forced dormant error detection

Table 5- 40 X531: Fail-safe digital inputs

Terminal Designation 1) Technical data

1 L2+ Switched voltage: +24 V DC
Max. total load current: 500 mA
(voltage is switched for a test stop)
2 DI 10 F-DI 5 Voltage: -3 … +30 V DC
3 DI 11+ Current consumption typical: 3.2 mA at 24 V
4 DI 12 F-DI 6 Electrical isolation:
Reference potential, see terminal 6, 7, 8
5 DI 13+
All digital inputs are isolated.
Signal level (including ripple)
High level: 15 … 30 V
Low level: -3 … +5 V
Input delay:2)
for "0" → "1": 30 μs (100 Hz)
for "1" → "0": 60 μs (100 Hz)
6 DI 11- F-DI 5 Reference potential to DI 11+
7 DI 13- F-DI 6 Reference potential to DI 13+
8 M1 Reference potential to DI 10, DI 12, L2+
An F-DI comprises 1 digital input and a 2nd digital input where, in addition, the cathode of the optocoupler is fed-out.
F-DI 5 = terminals 2, 3 and 6
F-DI 6 = terminals 4, 5 and 7
Type: Screw terminal 1 (Page 360)
Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm²
1) DI: Digital input, F-DI: Fail-safe digital input
2) Pure hardware delay

Note
Execution of a test stop
The test stop of the F-DI 5 to F-DI 9 can only be performed if the F-DI is supplied from L2+.

Note
Ensuring the function of digital inputs
For the digital inputs DIx+ to function, the reference potential must be connected to input
DIx- in each case.
This is achieved by using one of the following measures:
1. Providing the ground reference of the digital inputs
2. A jumper between DIx- and terminal M1

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 177
Terminal Modules
5.5 Terminal Module TM54F

5.5.2.11 X532 fail-safe digital inputs

Table 5- 41 X532: Fail-safe digital inputs

Terminal Designation1) Technical data

1 DI 14 F-DI 7 Voltage: -3 … +30 V DC
2 DI 15+ Current consumption typical: 3.2 mA at 24 V
3 DI 16 F-DI 8 Electrical isolation:
4 DI 17+ Reference potential, see terminals 7, 8, 9, 10
All digital inputs are isolated.
5 DI 18 F-DI 9
Signal level (including ripple)
6 DI 19+ High level: 15 … 30 V
Low level: -3 … +5 V
Input delay:2)
for "0" → "1": 30 μs (100 Hz)
for "1" → "0": 60 μs (100 Hz)
7 DI 15- F-DI 7 Reference potential for DI 15+
8 DI 17- F-DI 8 Reference potential for DI 17+
9 DI 19- F-DI 9 Reference potential for DI 19+
10 M1 Reference potential for DI 14, DI 16 and DI 18
An F-DI comprises 1 digital input and a 2nd digital input where, in addition, the cathode of the optocoupler is fed-out.
F-DI 7 = terminals 1, 2 and 7
F-DI 8 = terminals 3, 4 and 8
F-DI 9 = terminals 5, 6 and 9
Type: Screw terminal 1 (Page 360)
Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm²
1) DI: Digital input, F-DI: Fail-safe digital input
2) Pure hardware delay

Note
Execution of a test stop
The test stop of the F-DI 5 to F-DI 9 can only be performed if the F-DI is supplied from L2+.

Note
Ensuring the function of digital inputs
For the digital inputs DIx+ to function, the reference potential must be connected to input
DIx- in each case.
This is achieved by using one of the following measures:
1. Providing the ground reference of the digital inputs
2. A jumper between DIx- and terminal M1

Control Units and additional system components

178 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.5 Terminal Module TM54F

5.5.2.12 X533 fail-safe digital output

Table 5- 42 X533: Fail-safe digital output

Terminal Designation1) Technical data

1 DI 22 Voltage: -3 … +30 V DC
Current consumption typical: 3.2 mA at 24 V
Electrical isolation: Reference potential is terminal M1.
The digital input is electrically isolated.
Signal level (including ripple)
High level: 15 … 30 V
Low level: -3 … +5 V
Input delay:2)
for "0" → "1": 30 μs (100 Hz)
F-DO 2 for "1" → "0": 60 μs (100 Hz)
2 DO 2+ 0.5 A (reference potential is terminal M1)
3 DO 2- 0.5 A (reference potential is terminal L1+, L2+ or L3+)
Output delay:2)
for "0" → "1": 300 μs
for "1" → "0": 350 µs
Current consumption In total all DOs: 2 A
Max. leakage current: < 0.5 mA
Switching frequency:
for ohmic load: Max. 100 Hz
For inductive load: Max. 0.5 Hz
For lamp load: Max. 10 Hz
Maximum lamp load: 5 W
An F-DO comprises 2 digital outputs and 1 digital input for feedback signal
F-DO 2 = terminals 1, 2, and 3
Type: Screw terminal 1 (Page 360)
Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm²
1) DI: Digital input; DO: Digital output F-DO: Fail-safe digital output
2) Pure hardware delay

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 179
Terminal Modules
5.5 Terminal Module TM54F

5.5.2.13 X535 fail-safe digital output

Table 5- 43 X535: Fail-safe digital output

Terminal Designation1) Technical data

1 DI 23 Voltage: -3 … +30 V DC
Current consumption typical: 3.2 mA at 24 V
Electrical isolation: Reference potential is terminal M1.
The digital input is electrically isolated.
Signal level (including ripple)
High level: 15 … 30 V
Low level: -3 … +5 V
Input delay:2)
for "0" → "1": 30 μs (100 Hz)
F-DO 3 for "1" → "0": 60 μs (100 Hz)
2 DO 3+ 0.5 A (reference potential is terminal M1)
3 DO 3- 0.5 A (reference potential is terminal L1+, L2+ or L3+)
Output delay:2)
for "0" → "1": 300 μs
for "1" → "0": 350 µs
Current consumption In total all DOs: 2 A
Max. leakage current: < 0.5 mA
Switching frequency:
for ohmic load: Max. 100 Hz
For inductive load: Max. 0.5 Hz
For lamp load: Max. 10 Hz
Maximum lamp load: 5 W
An F-DO comprises 2 digital outputs and 1 digital input for feedback signal
F-DO 3 = terminals 1, 2, and 3
Type: Screw terminal 1 (see Screw terminals (Page 360))
Max. connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm²
1) DI: Digital input; DO: Digital output F-DO: Fail-safe digital output
2) Pure hardware delay

Control Units and additional system components

180 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.5 Terminal Module TM54F

5.5.3 Connection example

Figure 5-19 Connection example off TM54F

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 181
Terminal Modules
5.5 Terminal Module TM54F

5.5.4 Meaning of the LEDs

Table 5- 44 Meaning of the LEDs on the Terminal Module TM54F

LED Color Status Description, cause Remedy

READY - Off The electronics power supply is missing or outside the –
permissible tolerance range.
Green Continuous The component is ready for operation, cyclic DRIVE- –
light CLiQ communication is taking place.
Orange Continuous DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established. –
light
Red Continuous This component has at least one fault. Remedy and
light Note: acknowledge
The LED is activated irrespective of whether the fault
corresponding messages have been reconfigured.
Green / Red 0.5 Hz flashing Firmware is being downloaded. –
light
2 Hz flashing Firmware download is complete. Wait for POWER ON. Carry out a
light POWER ON
Green / Orange Flashing light Component recognition via LED is activated. This –
or function is parameterizable (see SINAMICS S120/S150
List Manual).
Red / Orange
Note:
Both options depend on the LED status when
component recognition is activated.
L1+, L2+, – ON The controllable sensor power supply is functioning –
fault-free.
Red Continuous There is a fault in the controllable sensor power supply. –
light
L3+ – ON The sensor power supply is operating fault-free.
Red Continuous The sensor power supply has a fault.
light

Control Units and additional system components

182 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.5 Terminal Module TM54F

LED Color Status Description, cause Remedy

Fail-safe inputs / double inputs
F_DI z LED LED –
(input x, x x+1 NC contact / NC contact1): (z = 0 … 9, x = 0, 2, … 18)
(x+1)+,
(x+1)-) – Red Continuous Different signal states at input x and x+1
light
– – – No signal at input x and no signal at input x+1
NC contact / NO contact1): (z = 0 … 9, x = 0, 2, … 18)
– Red Continuous Same signal states at input x and x+1
light
– – – No signal at input x and no signal at input x+1
LED LED
x x+1 NC contact / NC contact1): (z = 0 … 9, x = 0, 2, … 18)
Green Green Continuous One signal at input x and one signal at input x+1
light
NC contact / NO contact1): (z = 0 … 9, x = 0, 2, … 18)
Green Green Continuous One signal at input x and no signal at input x+1 –
light
Single digital inputs, not fail-safe
DI x – Off No signal at digital input x (x = 20 ... 23) –
Green Continuous Signal at digital input x –
light
Fail-safe digital outputs with associated readback channel
F_DO y Green Continuous Output y (y = 0 … 3) has an active signal –
(0+..3+, light
0-..3-)
Readback input DI 2y for output F_DO y (y = 0 ... 3) for test stop.
The status of the LEDs also depends on the type of external circuit.
DI 2y – Off One of the two output lines y+ or y- or both lines of –
output y carry a signal
Green Continuous Both output lines y+ and y- carry no signal –
light
1) Inputs x+1 (DI 1+, 3+, .. 19+) can be individually adjusted using a parameter (see SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual)

Cause and rectification of faults

The following documents contain information about the cause of faults and how they can be
rectified:
SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual (IH1)
SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual (LH1)

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 183
Terminal Modules
5.5 Terminal Module TM54F

5.5.5 Dimension drawing

Figure 5-20 Dimension drawing of Terminal Module TM54F, all data in mm and (inches)

Control Units and additional system components

184 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.5 Terminal Module TM54F

5.5.6 Installation

Installation
1. Tilt the component backwards slightly and attach it to the DIN rail using the hooks.
2. Swivel the component onto the DIN rail until you hear the mounting slide at the rear latch
into position.
3. Slide the components along the mounting rail to either the left or right up to their final
position.

Removal
1. First shift the mounting slide downwards at the lug to release the interlocking with the
mounting rail.
2. Swivel the component to the front and withdraw it upwards from the DIN rail.

① Mounting slide
② Mounting rail
Figure 5-21 Removing from a DIN mounting rail

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 185
Terminal Modules
5.5 Terminal Module TM54F

5.5.7 Protective conductor connection and shield support

It is always advisable to shield the digital input and output wiring.
The following diagram shows a typical Weidmüller shield connection clamp for the shield
supports.

① Protective conductor connection M4 / 1.8 Nm

② Shield connection terminal, Weidmüller company, type: KLBÜ CO1, order number:
1753311001

Figure 5-22 Shield support and protective conductor connection

NOTICE
Damage or faulty operation due to incorrect shielding or inadmissible cable lengths
If the correct shielding procedures or the permissible cable lengths are not observed, it can
cause damage or the machine may malfunction.
• Only use shielded cables.
• Do not exceed the cable lengths stated in the technical data.

Control Units and additional system components

186 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.5 Terminal Module TM54F

5.5.8 Technical data

Table 5- 45 Technical data

6SL3055-0AA00-3BAx Unit Value

Current requirement X524 (at 24 V DC) mA 160
without DRIVE-CLiQ supply
Current requirement X514 (at 24 V DC) mA 38
without digital outputs and sensor power supply
Sensor power supply with and without forced dormant error detection (L1+, L2+, L3+)
Voltage V 24
Max. load current per output A 0,5
Cable length for the 24 V supply: m < 30
The surge protection device "Weidmüller Item No. MCZ
OVP TAZ DIODE 24 VDC" must be used for longer
cable lengths.
Fail-safe digital inputs (F-DI) and standard digital inputs
Voltage V 0 … 30
Low level V -3 … +5
(an open digital input is interpreted as "low")
High level V 15 … 30
Current consumption (at 24 V DC) mA >2
Input delay 1)
- For "0" to "1" μs Approx. 30 (100 Hz)
- For "1" to "0" μs Approx. 60 (100 Hz)
Fail-safe digital outputs (F-DO), continuous short-circuit proof
Voltage V 24
Max. load current per digital output A 0,5
Output delay 1)
- For "0" to "1" μs 300
- For "1" to "0" μs 350
Power loss W 4.5 at 24 V
PE/ground connection At the housing with
M4 screw
Weight kg approx. 0.9
1) Pure hardware delay

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 187
Terminal Modules
5.6 Terminal Module TM120

5.6 Terminal Module TM120

5.6.1 Description
The Terminal Module TM120 is a DRIVE-CLiQ component for safe electrically isolated
temperature evaluation. It can be used for 1FN, 1FW6, and third-party motors in which the
temperature sensors cannot be installed with safe electrical separation. The TM120 is
installed in the control cabinet and can be snapped on to a DIN rail (EN 60715).
When a TM120 is being used, temperature evaluation and encoder evaluation functions are
separated off from one another. The TM120 can detect the motor temperature via 4
channels with different temperature sensors. Encoder evaluation functions are performed via
Sensor Modules (e.g. SMCxx, SMExx). This means that, when connected to a Sensor
Module SMCxx, the TM120 represents a control cabinet alternative to the SME120/SME125.
The TM120 contains the following interfaces:

Table 5- 46 Overview of the TM120 interfaces

Type Quantity
DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces 2
Temperature sensor inputs 4

Control Units and additional system components

188 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.6 Terminal Module TM120

5.6.2 Interface description

5.6.2.1 Overview

Figure 5-23 Interface overview TM120

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 189
Terminal Modules
5.6 Terminal Module TM120

5.6.2.2 X500/X501 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces

Table 5- 47 X500/X501: DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) Power supply
B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Connector RJ34plus socket
type

The blanking covers for the DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces are included in the scope of delivery.
Blanking covers (50 x) order number: 6SL3066-4CA00-0AA0

Note
The maximum DRIVE-CLiQ cable length is 100 m.

Control Units and additional system components

190 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.6 Terminal Module TM120

5.6.2.3 X521 temperature sensor input

Table 5- 48 X521: Temperature sensor input

Terminal Function Technical data

1 - Temp Temperature sensor connection KTY84-1C130/PTC/
2 + Temp bimetallic switch with NC contact
In linear motor applications, connect the KTY84-1C130
motor temperature sensor here
3 - Temp Temperature sensor connection KTY84-1C130/PTC/
4 + Temp bimetallic switch with NC contact
In linear motor applications, connect the PTC triple
element 1 or bimetallic switch here
5 - Temp Temperature sensor connection KTY84-1C130/PTC/
6 + Temp bimetallic switch with NC contact
In linear motor applications, connect the PTC triple
element 2 here
7 - Temp Temperature sensor connection KTY84-1C130/PTC/
8 + Temp bimetallic switch with NC contact
In linear motor applications, connect the PTC triple
element 3 here
Type: Spring-loaded terminal 5 (Page 359)
Max. cross-section that can be connected: 6 mm2
Measuring current via the temperature sensor connection: 2 mA

NOTICE
Damage when using a non-specified temperature sensor
If sensors other than those specified are connected, this may result in incorrect measured
values. Damage can result if overheating is not detected.
• Only connect temperature sensors that have been specified for operation with a TM120
Terminal Module.

NOTICE
Overheating of the motor through jumpering the temperature sensor connections
Jumpering of the temperature sensor connections "+ Temp" and "- Temp" results in
incorrect measurement results. Damage to the motor can result if the overheating is not
detected.
• When using several temperature sensors, separately connect the individual sensors to
"+ Temp" and "- Temp".

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 191
Terminal Modules
5.6 Terminal Module TM120

The table below shows the preferable assignment of the connecting terminal for the
temperature sensor input:

Table 5- 49 Preferable assignment, X521 temperature sensor input

Signal name Meaning

Terminal 1FW6 1FN3 1FN1 Segment motor
(2x1FN3) 4 segments
1 KTY N KTY N KTY N 1 PTC 120 °C KTY, negative pole
2 KTY P KTY P KTY P 1 PTC 120 °C KTY, positive pole
3 PTC 130 °C PTC 120 °C Bimetallic switch 2_PTC 120 °C PTC triple element 1 or
with NC contact bimetallic switch with NC
4 PTC 130 °C PTC 120 °C Bimetallic switch 2_PTC 120 °C contact
with NC contact
5 PTC 150 °C (2_KTY_N) 3_PTC 120 °C PTC triple element 2
6 PTC 150 °C (2_KTY_P) 3_PTC 120 °C
7 (2 PTC 120 °C) 4 PTC 120 °C PTC triple element 3
8 (2 PTC 120 °C) 4 PTC 120 °C

The interconnection given is a suggestion (software default setting). Which temperature

sensor is connected to which input can be freely configured.

NOTICE
Damage to motor in the event of incorrectly connected KTY temperature sensor
A KTY temperature sensor connected with incorrect polarity cannot detect if the motor
overheats. Overheating can cause damage to the motor.
• Connect a KTY temperature sensor with the correct polarity.

Note
A 6FX7008-1BCx1 power cable is recommended for connecting the KTY temperature
sensors.

Note
The maximum length of the temperature sensor cable is 100 m. The cables must be
shielded.

Control Units and additional system components

192 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.6 Terminal Module TM120

5.6.2.4 X524 Electronics power supply

Table 5- 50 X524: Electronics power supply

Terminal Designation Technical data

+ Electronics power supply Voltage: 24 V DC (20.4 V – 28.8 V)
+ Electronics power supply Current consumption (max./typ.): 0.5 A /
0.1 A
M Electronics ground
Max. current via jumper in connector:
M Electronics ground 20 A (15 A according to UL/CSA)

Type: Screw terminal 2 (Page 360)

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 2.5 mm²

The maximum cable length that can be connected is 10 m.

Note
The two "+" or "M" terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures that the supply
voltage is looped through.
The current consumption increases by the value for the DRIVE-CLiQ node.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 193
Terminal Modules
5.6 Terminal Module TM120

5.6.3 Connection examples

Each TM120 is directly connected to an encoder evaluation unit (SMCxx or SMExx) by
looping the corresponding DRIVE-CLiQ channel via the TM120. This ensures that encoders
are automatically assigned to the temperature signals and, consequently, to the correct axis.
The assignment can also be performed manually.

Figure 5-24 Connection example of TM120

Control Units and additional system components

194 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.6 Terminal Module TM120

Figure 5-25 Connection example of TM120 with Motor Module and SMC20 (encoder evaluation)

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 195
Terminal Modules
5.6 Terminal Module TM120

5.6.4 Meaning of the LED

Table 5- 51 Meaning of the LEDs on the Terminal Module TM120

LED Color Status Description, cause Remedy

READY - Off The electronics power supply is missing or outside the Check the power
permissible tolerance range. supply.
Green Continuous The component is ready for operation. Cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ -
light communication is taking place.
Orange Continuous DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established. -
light
This component has at least one fault. Remove and
Red Continuous Note: acknowledge the
light The LED is activated regardless of whether the corresponding fault.
messages have been reconfigured.
Green/ Flashing Firmware is being downloaded. -
Red light
0.5 Hz
Flashing Firmware download has been completed. The system waits Carry out a POWER
light for POWER ON. ON.
2 Hz
Green/ Detection of the components via LED is activated1). -
orange Flashing Note:
or light Both options depend on the LED status when activated.
red/ 2 Hz
orange
1) See SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual for the parameters to activate the recognition of components via LED

Cause and rectification of faults

The following documents contain information about the cause of faults and how they can be
rectified:
SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual (IH1)
SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual (LH1)

Control Units and additional system components

196 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.6 Terminal Module TM120

5.6.5 Dimension drawing

Figure 5-26 Dimension drawing of Terminal Module TM120, all data in mm and (inches)

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 197
Terminal Modules
5.6 Terminal Module TM120

5.6.6 Installation

Installation
1. Tilt the component backwards slightly and attach it to the DIN rail using the hooks.
2. Swivel the component onto the DIN rail until you hear the mounting slide at the rear latch
into position.
3. Slide the components along the mounting rail to either the left or right up to their final
position.

Removal
1. First shift the mounting slide downwards at the lug to release the interlocking with the
mounting rail.
2. Swivel the component to the front and withdraw it upwards from the DIN rail.

① Mounting slide
② Mounting rail
Figure 5-27 Removal of a TM120 from a DIN rail

Control Units and additional system components

198 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.6 Terminal Module TM120

5.6.7 Protective conductor connection and shield support

The following diagram shows a typical Weidmüller shield connection clamp for the shield
supports.

① Protective conductor connection M4 / 1.8 Nm

② Shield connection terminal, Weidmüller company, type: KLBÜ CO1, order number:
1753311001

Figure 5-28 Shield support and protective conductor connection of the TM120

NOTICE
Damage or faulty operation due to incorrect shielding or inadmissible cable lengths
If the correct shielding procedures or the permissible cable lengths are not observed, it can
cause damage or the machine may malfunction.
• Only use shielded cables.
• Do not exceed the cable lengths stated in the technical data.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 199
Terminal Modules
5.6 Terminal Module TM120

5.6.8 Technical data

Table 5- 52 Technical data

6SL3055-0AA00-3KAx Unit Value

Electronics power supply
Voltage VDC 24 V DC (20.4 ... 28.8)
Current (without DRIVE-CLiQ) ADC 0.20/0.1 (typ.)
Power loss W 2.4 (typ.)
PE/ground connection At the housing with M4/1.8 Nm screw
Weight kg 0,41
Degree of protection IP20

Control Units and additional system components

200 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.7 Terminal Module TM150

5.7 Terminal Module TM150

5.7.1 Description
The terminal module TM150 is a DRIVE-CLiQ component for temperature evaluation. The
temperature is measured in a temperature range from -99 °C to +250 °C for the following
temperature sensors:
● PT100 (with monitoring for wire breakage and short-circuit)
● PT1000 (with monitoring for wire breakage and short-circuit)
● KTY84 (with monitoring for wire breakage and short-circuit)
● PTC (with short-circuit monitoring)
● Bimetallic NC contact (without monitoring)
For the temperature sensor inputs, for each terminal block the evaluation can be
parameterized for 1x2-wire,
2x2-wire, 3-wire or 4-wire. There is no galvanic isolation in the TM150.
The TM150 is mounted in the control cabinet and can be snapped on to a standard mounting
rail (EN 60715).
The TM150 contains the following interfaces:

Table 5- 53 Overview of the TM150 interfaces

Type Quantity
DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces 2
Temperature sensor inputs 6/12
Electronics power supply 1

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 201
Terminal Modules
5.7 Terminal Module TM150

5.7.2 Interface description

5.7.2.1 Overview

Figure 5-29 Interface overview of Terminal Module TM150

Control Units and additional system components

202 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.7 Terminal Module TM150

5.7.2.2 X500/X501 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces

Table 5- 54 X500/X501: DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) Power supply, max. 450 mA
B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Connector DRIVE-CLiQ socket
type

The blanking covers for the DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces are included in the scope of delivery.
Blanking covers (50 pcs) order number: 6SL3066-4CA00-0AA0

Note
The maximum DRIVE-CLiQ cable length is 100 m.

5.7.2.3 X524 Electronics power supply

Table 5- 55 X524: Electronics power supply

Terminal Designation Technical data

+ Electronics power supply Voltage: 24 V DC (20.4 V – 28.8 V)
+ Electronics power supply Current consumption (max./typ.): 0.5 A /
0.1 A
M Electronics ground
Max. current via jumper in connector:
M Electronics ground 20 A (15 A according to UL/CSA)

Type: Screw terminal 2 (Page 360)

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 2.5 mm²

The maximum cable length that can be connected is 10 m.

Note
The two "+" or "M" terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures that the supply
voltage is looped through.
The current consumption increases by the value for the DRIVE-CLiQ node.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 203
Terminal Modules
5.7 Terminal Module TM150

5.7.2.4 X531-X536 temperature sensor inputs

Table 5- 56 X531-X536: Temperature sensor inputs

Terminal Function Function Technical data

1x2- / 2x2-wire 3 and 4-wire
1 + Temp + Temperature sensor connection for sensors with
(channel x) (channel x) 1x2 wires
Connection of the 2nd measurement cable for
sensors with 4-wires
2 - Temp - Temperature sensor connection for sensors with
(channel x) (channel x) 1x2 wires
Connection of the 1st measurement cable for
sensors with 3 and 4-wires.
3 + Temp + Ic Temperature sensor connection for sensors with
(channel y) (constant current, positive 2x2, 3 and 4-wires
channel x)
4 - Temp - Ic
(channel y) (constant current,
negative
channel x)
Type: Spring-loaded terminal 3 (Page 359)
Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm2
Measuring current via temperature sensor connection: approx. 0.83 mA

When connecting temperature sensors with 3 wires, a jumper must be inserted between
X53x.2 and X53x.4.

Table 5- 57 Channel assignment

Terminal Channel number [x] Channel number [y]

for 1x2, 3 and 4-wires for 2x2 wires
X531 0 6
X532 1 7
X533 2 8
X534 3 9
X535 4 10
X536 5 11

NOTICE
Damage to motor in the event of incorrectly connected KTY temperature sensor
A KTY temperature sensor connected with incorrect polarity cannot detect if the motor
overheats. Overheating can cause damage to the motor.
• Connect a KTY temperature sensor with the correct polarity.

Control Units and additional system components

204 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.7 Terminal Module TM150

NOTICE
Overheating of the motor through jumpering the temperature sensor connections
Jumpering of the temperature sensor connections "+ Temp" and "- Temp" results in
incorrect measurement results. Damage to the motor can result if the overheating is not
detected.
• When using several temperature sensors, separately connect the individual sensors to
"+ Temp" and "- Temp".

NOTICE
Overheating of the motor through cables with too high a resistance
Cable length and cable cross-section can falsify the temperature measurement (10 Ω cable
resistance for a PT100 can falsify the measurement result by 10%). Damage to the motor
can result if the overheating is not detected.
• Use only cable lengths ≤ 300 m.
• For cable lengths >100 m, use cables with a cross-section of ≥1 mm2.

NOTICE
Device failure as a result of unshielded or incorrectly routed cables to temperature sensors
Unshielded or incorrectly routed cables to temperature sensors can result in interference
being coupled into the signal processing electronics from the power side. This can result in
significant disturbance of all signals (fault messages) up to failure of individual components
(destruction of the devices).
• Only use shielded cables as temperature sensor cables.
• If temperature sensor cables are routed together with the motor cable, use separately
shielded cables twisted in pairs.
• Connect the cable shield at both ends to ground potential through a large surface area.
• Recommendation: Use suitable Motion Connect cables.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 205
Terminal Modules
5.7 Terminal Module TM150

5.7.3 Connection examples

Figure 5-30 Connecting a PT100/PT1000 with 2x2, 3 and 4-wires to the temperature sensor inputs
X53x of Terminal Module TM150

Control Units and additional system components

206 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.7 Terminal Module TM150

Figure 5-31 Connection example for a Terminal Module TM150

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 207
Terminal Modules
5.7 Terminal Module TM150

5.7.4 Meaning of the LED

5.7.4.1 Terminal Module TM150

Table 5- 58 Meaning of the LEDs at the Terminal Module TM150

LED Color Status Description, cause Remedy

READY – Off The electronics power supply is missing or outside the Check the power
permissible tolerance range. supply.
Green Continuou The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE- –
s light CLiQ communication is taking place.
Orange Continuou DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established. –
s light
This component has at least one fault. Remove and
Red Continuou Note: acknowledge the fault.
s light LED is controlled irrespective of the corresponding
messages being reconfigured.
Green/ Flashing Firmware is being downloaded. –
Red light
0.5 Hz
Flashing Firmware has been downloaded. Carry out a POWER
light The system waits for POWER ON. ON
2 Hz
Green/ Component recognition via LED is activated1). –
orange Flashing Note:
or light Both options depend on the LED status when component
red/ 2 Hz recognition is activated.
orange
1) See SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual for the parameters to activate the recognition of components via LED

Cause and rectification of faults

The following documents contain information about the cause of faults and how they can be
rectified:
SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual (IH1)
SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual (LH1)

Control Units and additional system components

208 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.7 Terminal Module TM150

5.7.5 Dimension drawing

Figure 5-32 Dimension drawing of Terminal Module TM150, all data in mm and (inches)

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 209
Terminal Modules
5.7 Terminal Module TM150

5.7.6 Installation

Installation
1. Tilt the component backwards slightly and attach it to the DIN rail using the hooks.
2. Swivel the component onto the DIN rail until you hear the mounting slide at the rear latch
into position.
3. Slide the components along the mounting rail to either the left or right up to their final
position.

Removal
1. First shift the mounting slide downwards at the lug to release the interlocking with the
mounting rail.
2. Swivel the component to the front and withdraw it upwards from the DIN rail.

① Mounting slide
② Mounting rail
Figure 5-33 Removing a TM150 from a mounting rail

Control Units and additional system components

210 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Terminal Modules
5.7 Terminal Module TM150

5.7.7 Protective conductor connection and shield support

The following diagram shows a typical Weidmüller shield connection clamp for the shield
supports.

① Protective conductor connection M4 / 1.8 Nm

② Shield connection terminal, Weidmüller company, type: KLBÜ CO1, order number:
1753311001

Figure 5-34 Shield support and protective conductor connection of the TM150

NOTICE
Damage or faulty operation due to incorrect shielding or inadmissible cable lengths
If the correct shielding procedures or the permissible cable lengths are not observed, it can
cause damage or the machine may malfunction.
• Only use shielded cables.
• Do not exceed the cable lengths stated in the technical data.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 211
Terminal Modules
5.7 Terminal Module TM150

5.7.8 Technical data

Table 5- 59 Technical data

6SL3055-0AA00-3LA0 Unit Value

Voltage VDC 24 (20,4 … 28,8)
Current (without DRIVE-CLiQ) ADC 0,07
Power loss W 1,6
PE/ground connection At the housing with M4/1.8 Nm screw
Weight kg 0,4
Degree of protection IP20

Control Units and additional system components

212 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
Hub Modules 6
6.1 Safety instructions for Hub Modules

WARNING
Danger to life if the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks are not carefully
observed
If the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks in Chapter 1 (Page 19) are not
observed, accidents involving severe injuries or death may occur.
• Adhere to the fundamental safety instructions.
• When assessing the risk, take into account remaining risks.

NOTICE
Damage through use of incorrect DRIVE-CLiQ cables
Damage or malfunctions can occur on the devices or system when incorrect or unreleased
DRIVE-CLiQ cables are used.
• Only use suitable DRIVE-CLiQ cables that have been released by Siemens for the
respective application.

Note
Function equipotential bonding for distributed DRIVE-CLiQ nodes
Integrate all of the components that are connected via DRIVE-CLiQ in the functional
equipotential bonding concept. The connection should be preferably established by mounting
on metallic bare machine and plant components that are connected with one another using
an equipotential bonding conductor.
Alternatively, you can establish equipotential bonding using a conductor (min. 6 mm²), which
as far as possible, is routed in parallel to the DRIVE-CLiQ cable. This applies to all
distributed DRIVE-CLiQ nodes such as DM20, SME2x, SME12x, etc.

Note
Malfunctions due to polluted DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces
Malfunctions can occur in the system through the use of polluted DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces.
• Cover unused DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces with the supplied blanking covers.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 213
Hub Modules
6.2 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20

6.2 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20

6.2.1 Description
The DRIVE-CLiQ DMC20 Hub Module is used to implement star-shaped distribution of a
DRIVE-CLiQ line. With the DMC20, an axis grouping can be expanded with 5 DRIVE-CLiQ
sockets for additional subgroups.
The component is especially suitable for applications which require DRIVE-CLiQ nodes to be
removed in groups, without interrupting the DRIVE-CLiQ line and, therefore, the data
exchange process.

WARNING
Risk of fire through overheating if there are insufficient ventilation clearances
Insufficient ventilation clearances lead to overheating with associated risk to persons as a
result of smoke and fire. This can also result in more downtimes and a reduced service life
for the Hub Module.
• For this reason, it is imperative that you maintain the 50 mm clearances above and
below the Hub Module.

Control Units and additional system components

214 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Hub Modules
6.2 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20

6.2.2 Interface description

6.2.2.1 Overview

Figure 6-1 Interface overview of the DMC20

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 215
Hub Modules
6.2 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20

6.2.2.2 X500-X505 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces

Table 6- 1 X500-X505: DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) Power supply
B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Connector DRIVE-CLiQ socket
type

The blanking covers for the DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces are included in the scope of delivery.
Blanking covers (50 x) Order number: 6SL3066-4CA00-0AA0

Note
Only MOTION-CONNECT DRIVE-CLiQ cables may be used to establish connections.
The maximum length of MOTION-CONNECT 500 is 100 m and for MOTION-CONNECT
800PLUS cables, 75 m.

Control Units and additional system components

216 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Hub Modules
6.2 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20

6.2.2.3 X524 Electronics power supply

Table 6- 2 X524: Electronics power supply

Terminal Designation Technical data

+ Electronics power supply Voltage: 24 V DC (20.4 ... 28.8 V)
+ Electronics power supply Current consumption: max. 0.5 A
M Electronics ground Max. current via jumper in connector:
20 A (15 A according to UL/CSA)
M Electronics ground

Type: Screw terminal 2 (Page 360)

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 2.5 mm2

The maximum cable length that can be connected is 10 m.

Note
The two "+" or "M" terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures that the supply
voltage is looped through.
The current consumption increases by the value for the DRIVE-CLiQ participants.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 217
Hub Modules
6.2 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20

6.2.3 Meaning of the LED

Table 6- 3 Description of the LEDs on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20

LED Color Status Description, cause Remedy

READY – Off The electronics power supply is missing or outside the –
permissible tolerance range.
Green Continuou The component is ready for operation. Cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ –
s light communication is taking place.
Orange Continuou DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established. –
s light
Red Continuou This component has at least one fault. Remove and
s light Note: acknowledge the fault.
LED is controlled irrespective of the corresponding
messages being reconfigured.
Green/red Flashing Firmware is being downloaded. –
light 0.5
Hz
Flashing Firmware download has been completed. The system waits Carry out a POWER
light 2 Hz for POWER ON. ON.
Green/ Flashing Component recognition via LED is activated1). –
orange light Note:
or Both options depend on the LED status when component
Red/ recognition is activated.
orange
1) See SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual for the parameters to activate the recognition of components via LED

Cause and rectification of faults

The following documents contain information about the cause of faults and how they can be
rectified:
SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual (IH1)
SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual (LH1)

Control Units and additional system components

218 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Hub Modules
6.2 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20

6.2.4 Dimension drawing

Figure 6-2 Dimension drawing of the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20, all data in mm and (inches)

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 219
Hub Modules
6.2 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20

6.2.5 Installation

Installation
1. Tilt the component backwards slightly and attach it to the DIN rail using the hooks.
2. Swivel the component onto the DIN rail until you hear the mounting slide at the rear latch
into position.
3. Slide the components along the mounting rail to either the left or right up to their final
position.

Removal
1. First shift the mounting slide downwards at the lug to release the interlocking with the
mounting rail.
2. Swivel the component to the front and withdraw it upwards from the DIN rail.

① Mounting slide
② Mounting rail
Figure 6-3 Removing from a DIN mounting rail

Control Units and additional system components

220 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Hub Modules
6.2 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20

6.2.6 Protective conductor connection and shield support

The following diagram shows a typical Weidmüller shield connection clamp for the shield
supports.

① Protective conductor connection M4 / 1.8 Nm

② Shield connection terminal, Weidmüller company, type: KLBÜ CO1, order number:
1753311001

Figure 6-4 Shield support and protective conductor connection

NOTICE
Damage or faulty operation due to incorrect shielding or inadmissible cable lengths
If the correct shielding procedures or the permissible cable lengths are not observed, it can
cause damage or the machine may malfunction.
• Only use shielded cables.
• Do not exceed the cable lengths stated in the technical data.

6.2.7 Technical data

Table 6- 4 Technical data of the DMC20

6SL3055-0AA00-6AAx Unit Value

Electronics power supply
Voltage VDC 24 V DC (20.4 ... 28.8)
Current (without DRIVE-CLiQ node) ADC 0,15
PE/ground connection At the housing with M4/1.8 Nm screw
Weight kg 0,8

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 221
Hub Modules
6.3 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External DME20

6.3 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External DME20

6.3.1 Description
The DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External DME20 is used to implement star-shaped distribution
of a DRIVE-CLiQ line. With the DME20, an axis grouping can be expanded with 5 DRIVE-
CLiQ sockets for additional subgroups.
The component has degree of protection IP67 and is especially suitable for applications
which require DRIVE-CLiQ nodes to be removed in groups, without interrupting the DRIVE-
CLiQ line and therefore the data exchange.

NOTICE
Damage due to leaking plug connections
If IP67 protection is not ensured, water or dirt can enter and lead to damage.
• Ensure that all connectors are correctly screwed into place and appropriately locked.

Control Units and additional system components

222 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Hub Modules
6.3 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External DME20

6.3.2 Interface description

6.3.2.1 Overview

Figure 6-5 Interface overview of the DME20

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 223
Hub Modules
6.3 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External DME20

6.3.2.2 X500-X505 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces

Table 6- 5 X500-X505: DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) Power supply
B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Connector DRIVE-CLiQ socket
type

The blanking covers for the DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces are included in the scope of delivery.
Blanking covers (6 pcs) order number: 6SL3066-4CA01-0AA0

Note
Only MOTION-CONNECT DRIVE-CLiQ cables may be used to establish connections.
The maximum length of MOTION-CONNECT 500 is 100 m and for MOTION-CONNECT
800PLUS cables, 75 m.

6.3.2.3 X524 Electronics power supply

Table 6- 6 X524: Electronics power supply

Pin Designation Technical data

1 Electronics power supply The connection voltage of 20.4 V to
2 Electronics power supply 28.8 V refers to the (terminal) voltage at
the DME20. This must be taken into
3 Electronics ground account when selecting the cable cross-
4 Electronics ground section and supply cable lengths.
5 not connected Pins 1 and 2: jumpered internally
Pins 3 and 4: jumpered internally

5-pin socket,
max. connectable cross-section: 4 x 0.75 mm2

Control Units and additional system components

224 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Hub Modules
6.3 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External DME20

Note
The maximum cable length for the 24 V supply of the DME20 is 100 m.

In case no UL-compliant design is required, is the use of the following cables and connectors
from Siemens is recommended:

Pre-assembled cables
Connecting cable for power supply with M12 plug and M12 socket,
A-coded, 4-pin,
order number: 6XV1801-5D..

Cables to be assembled by the user

Cable Connector
24 V DC cable, M12 plug connector,
2-wire, 2 x 0.75 mm2, 4-pin, A-coded,
order number: 6XV1812-8A order number: 6GK1907-0DC10-6AA3

Table 6- 7 Cable length P24 supply cable

Connected 1 2 3 4 5
loads 1)m

Cross-section
0.34 mm² 75 m 45 m 30 m 25 m 20 m
2 x 0.34 mm² 100 m 90 m 65 m 50 m 40 m
0.75 mm² 100 m 100 m 75 m 60 m 50 m
2 x 0.75 mm² 100 m 100 m 100 m 100 m 100 m
Ta = 55 °C
100 m DRIVE-CLiQ
1) Connected motors with DRIVE-CLiQ encoder, DRIVE CLiQ mounted encoder SME

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 225
Hub Modules
6.3 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External DME20

6.3.3 Dimension drawing

Figure 6-6 Dimension drawing of the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External DME20, all data in mm and
(inches)

Control Units and additional system components

226 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Hub Modules
6.3 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External DME20

6.3.4 Installation

① Contact surface

Figure 6-7 Mounting dimensions DME20

Installation
1. Place the drilling pattern on the mounting surface. Make sure that the contact surface is
bare, unpainted metal.
2. Drill two holes with Ø 5.3 or M5 threaded holes according to the drilling pattern.
3. Mount the DME20 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External on the contact surface. The
tightening torque is 6.0 Nm.

6.3.5 Technical data

Table 6- 8 Technical data of the DME20

6SL3055-0AA00-6ABx Unit Value

Electronics power supply
Voltage VDC 24 (20,4 … 28,8)
Current (without DRIVE-CLiQ node) ADC 0,15
PE/ground connection Screwed to the housing M5 / 6 Nm
Degree of protection IP67
Weight kg 0,8

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 227
Hub Modules
6.3 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External DME20

6.3.6 Specifications for use with UL approval

Pre-assembled cables
Sensor/actuator cable, 5-pin, variable cable,
free cable end at straight socket M12-SPEEDCON,
cable length: 2, 5, 10, 15 m
SAC-5P-xxx-186/FS SCO
Up to 100 m on request
Phoenix Contact

Cables to be assembled by the user

Cable Connector
Cable coil, black PUR/PVC, 5-pin Sensor/actuator connector, socket, straight, 5-pin,
Conductor colors: M12, A-coded
brown/white/blue/black/gray Screw connection, metal knurl,
Cable length: 100 m cable gland Pg9
SAC-5P-100.0-186/0.75 SACC-M12FS-5CON-PG9-M
Order number: 1535590 Order number: 1681486
Phoenix Contact

Power supply
The DME20 must use one of the following 24 V power supplies with voltage limiting:
● SITOP 6EP1x.. or 6ES7307..
● SINAMICS Control Supply Module 6SL3100-1DE22-0Axx

Pin assignment of the cable

Table 6- 9 Connection to X524 electronics power supply

Pin Designation Technical data

1 (brown)1) Electronics power supply The supply voltage of 20.4 V ... 28.8 V refers to the
2 (white) 1) Electronics power supply (terminal) voltage at the DME20. This must be taken
into account when selecting the cable cross-section
3 (black) 1) Electronics ground and supply cable lengths.
4 (blue) 1) Electronics ground Pins 1 and 2: jumpered internally
5 (gray) 1) Not connected internally Pins 3 and 4: jumpered internally

1) The colors refer to the cable specified above

Control Units and additional system components

228 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
Voltage Sensing Module VSM10 7
7.1 Description
The Voltage Sensing Module VSM10 is a voltage sensing module that is used to sense the
actual value of a voltage. For example, it can be used to sense the three-phase line supply
voltage, which is then provided to the closed-loop control. The phase differential voltage can
be measured, either grounded (in the delivery state) or isolated.
The Voltage Sensing Module can be used for the following line types:
● Up to 600 V 3-ph. AC for all line types
● Up to 690 V 3-ph. AC for networks with grounded start point and IT networks
A 100 V 3-ph. AC input is available for transducer transformers. It is not permissible to use
both voltage connections simultaneously!
For booksize units, these components can be optionally used to increase the degree of
ruggedness against irregularities in the line supply.
A VSM is already integrated for Active Interface Modules Chassis and Smart Line Modules
Chassis.
In addition to the voltage sensing, a temperature sensor can be connector to the VSM10 to
thermally monitor the line reactor. Further, the functionality of the line filter can checked
using two analog inputs. All data recorded are transferred to the higher-level system via
DRIVE-CLiQ.
The Voltage Sensing Module achieves radio interference category C2 with limit classes A1
for interference voltage and A for emitted interference.

Table 7- 1 Interface overview of the VSM10

Type Quantity
Analog inputs 2
Voltage connection (690 V) 1 (3-phase)
Voltage connection (100 V) 1 (3-phase)
Temperature senor input (KTY/PTC) 1
Neutral point grounding 1
DRIVE-CLiQ interface 1

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 229
Voltage Sensing Module VSM10
7.2 Safety instructions for the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM10)

7.2 Safety instructions for the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM10)

WARNING
Danger to life if the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks are not carefully
observed
If the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks in Chapter 1 (Page 19) are not
observed, accidents involving severe injuries or death may occur.
• Adhere to the fundamental safety instructions.
• When assessing the risk, take into account remaining risks.

WARNING
Risk of fire through overheating if there are insufficient ventilation clearances
Insufficient ventilation clearances lead to overheating with associated risk to persons as a
result of smoke and fire. This can also result in more downtimes and reduced service lives
of the Voltage Sensing Module.
• For this reason, it is imperative that you maintain the 50 mm clearances above and
below the Voltage Sensing Module.

NOTICE
Destruction of the VSM10 as a result of voltage measurements incorrectly carried out
If the voltage measurement is carried out incorrectly, the VSM10 can be destroyed as a
result of the high voltage stress across the insulating clearance.
• When using long motor cables, it is not permissible that the output voltage of the Motor
Module is directly measured at the motor.

NOTICE
Destruction of the VSM10 as a result of a terminal assignment which is not permissible
The VSM10 has two terminal strips, X521 and X522, to sense the three-phase line supply
voltage. A terminal assignment which is not permissible results in the module being
destroyed.
• Use just one of the two terminal strips.
• Only connect voltages to terminal strip X521 up to a maximum 100 V (phase-to-phase)
via a transformer.
• Only connect voltages to terminal strip X522 up to a maximum 690 V (phase-to-phase)
directly.

Control Units and additional system components

230 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Voltage Sensing Module VSM10
7.2 Safety instructions for the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM10)

NOTICE
Damage through use of incorrect DRIVE-CLiQ cables
Damage or malfunctions can occur on the devices or system when incorrect or unreleased
DRIVE-CLiQ cables are used.
• Only use suitable DRIVE-CLiQ cables that have been released by Siemens for the
respective application.

Note
Function equipotential bonding for distributed DRIVE-CLiQ nodes
Integrate all of the components that are connected via DRIVE-CLiQ in the functional
equipotential bonding concept. The connection should be preferably established by mounting
on metallic bare machine and plant components that are connected with one another using
an equipotential bonding conductor.
Alternatively, you can establish equipotential bonding using a conductor (min. 6 mm²), which
as far as possible, is routed in parallel to the DRIVE-CLiQ cable. This applies to all
distributed DRIVE-CLiQ nodes such as DM20, SME2x, SME12x, etc.

Note
Malfunctions due to polluted DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces
Malfunctions can occur in the system through the use of polluted DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces.
• Cover unused DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces with the supplied blanking covers.

Note
Malfunctions when using various generations of the VSM10 with parallel infeed
When connecting infeeds in parallel, only Voltage Sensing Modules of the same generation
may be used (either 6SL3053-0AA00-3AA0 or 6SL3053-0AA00-3AA1), as otherwise
malfunctions can occur.
• Especially when replacing a VSM10 (Page 247)it is important that all of the other VSM10
connected in parallel are replaced.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 231
Voltage Sensing Module VSM10
7.3 Interface description

7.3 Interface description

7.3.1 Overview

Figure 7-1 Interface overview of the VSM10

Control Units and additional system components

232 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Voltage Sensing Module VSM10
7.3 Interface description

Figure 7-2 X530 interface at the VSM10 (view from below)

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 233
Voltage Sensing Module VSM10
7.3 Interface description

7.3.2 X500 DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Table 7- 2 X500: DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) Power supply
B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Connector DRIVE-CLiQ socket
type

The blanking cover for the DRIVE-CLiQ port is included in the scope of delivery.
Blanking covers (50 x) Order number: 6SL3066-4CA00-0AA0

7.3.3 X520 analog inputs/temperature sensor

Table 7- 3 X520: Analog inputs/temperature sensor

Terminal Designation Technical data

1 AI 0- 2 analog differential inputs
2 AI 0+ Voltage: -10 … +10 V; Ri > 100 kΩ
3 AI 1- Resolution: 12 bits + sign

4 AI 1+
5 + Temp Temperature sensor KTY84-1C130/PTC
6 - Temp Measuring current via temperature sensor
connection: 2 mA

Type: Screw terminal 1 (Page 360)

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm²

Control Units and additional system components

234 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Voltage Sensing Module VSM10
7.3 Interface description

Note
Permissible voltage values
The common mode range must not be violated in order to avoid incorrect analog-digital
conversion results. The following voltages are permissible:
• Input voltage: ±30 V (destruction limit)
• Common mode voltage: ±10 V with respect to ground potential (increased errors when
exceeded)

NOTICE
Damage to motor in the event of incorrectly connected KTY temperature sensor
A KTY temperature sensor connected with incorrect polarity cannot detect if the motor
overheats. Overheating can cause damage to the motor.
• Connect a KTY temperature sensor with the correct polarity.

Note
In order to minimize noise emission, shielded cables should be used.

Note
The maximum cable length for a shielded cable applied on both sides to the temperature
sensor and to the analog inputs is 30 m.

WARNING
Danger to life due to electric shock in the event of voltage flashovers on the temperature
sensor cable
Voltage flashovers in the signal electronics can occur in motors without safe electrical
separation of the temperature sensors.
• Only use temperature sensors that fully comply with the specifications of the safety
isolation.
• If safe electrical separation cannot be guaranteed (for linear motors or third-party
motors, for example), use a Sensor Module External (SME120 or SME125) or Terminal
Module TM120.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 235
Voltage Sensing Module VSM10
7.3 Interface description

7.3.4 X521 three-phase voltage sensing up to 100 V 3-ph. AC

Table 7- 4 X521: Voltage sensing 100 V

Terminal Designation Technical data

1 Phase voltage U Connection to the voltage sensing for
2 Phase voltage V medium-voltage networks via a safe
electrically isolated transformer
3 Phase voltage W
Resistance to neutral point: ∼500 kΩ
Insulation resistance, neutral point - ground
when the jumper is not inserted: >10 MΩ
Type: Screw terminal 1 (Page 360)
Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm²

NOTICE
Destruction of the VSM10 as a result of a terminal assignment which is not permissible
The VSM10 has two terminal strips, X521 and X522, to sense the three-phase line supply
voltage. A terminal assignment which is not permissible results in the module being
destroyed.
• Use just one of the two terminal strips.
• Only connect voltages to terminal strip X521 up to a maximum 100 V (phase-to-phase)
via a transformer.
• Only connect voltages to terminal strip X522 up to a maximum 690 V (phase-to-phase)
directly.

Control Units and additional system components

236 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Voltage Sensing Module VSM10
7.3 Interface description

7.3.5 X522 three-phase voltage sensing up to 690 V 3-ph. AC

Table 7- 5 X522: Voltage sensing 690 V

Terminal Designation Technical data

1 Phase voltage U Directly connected to the line voltage
2 Phase voltage V sensing

3 Phase voltage W Resistance to neutral point: ∼3500 kΩ

Insulation resistance, neutral point - ground
when the jumper is not inserted: >10 MΩ
Type: Screw terminal 5 (Page 360)
Max. cross-section that can be connected: 6 mm²

NOTICE
Destruction of the VSM10 as a result of a terminal assignment which is not permissible
The VSM10 has two terminal strips, X521 and X522, to sense the three-phase line supply
voltage. A terminal assignment which is not permissible results in the module being
destroyed.
• Use just one of the two terminal strips.
• Only connect voltages to terminal strip X521 up to a maximum 100 V (phase-to-phase)
via a transformer.
• Only connect voltages to terminal strip X522 up to a maximum 690 V (phase-to-phase)
directly.

NOTICE
Damage to the VSM10 through overcurrent with an incorrect connection sequence
Enabling the Line Module with an incorrect connection sequence results in overcurrent.
• Connect the line phases to the VSM10 in the same sequence as the one to the Line
Module.

Note
Line voltage tap
If the configuration has a line filter, then the phase voltages for the VSM (X522) must be
taken from in front of the line filter. If the configuration does not have a line filter, then X522
must be connected to the line side of the line reactor (voltages are taken from in front of the
line reactor).

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 237
Voltage Sensing Module VSM10
7.3 Interface description

7.3.6 X524 Electronics power supply

Table 7- 6 X524: Electronics power supply

Terminal Designation Technical data

+ Electronics power supply Voltage: 24 V DC (20.4 ... 28.8 V)
+ Electronics power supply Current consumption: max. 0.2 A

M Electronics ground
Max. current via jumper in connector:
M Electronics ground 20 A

Type: Screw terminal 3 (Page 360)

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 2.5 mm²

The maximum cable length that can be connected is 10 m.

Note
The two "+" or "M" terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures that the supply
voltage is looped through.

Control Units and additional system components

238 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Voltage Sensing Module VSM10
7.3 Interface description

7.3.7 X530 neutral point grounding

Table 7- 7 X530: Neutral point grounding

Terminal Designation Technical data

1 Neutral point of the voltage Jumper inserted: Grounded
sensing measurement
2 Ground potential Jumper not inserted: isolated
measurement

Type: Spring-loaded terminal 5 (Page 359)

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 10 mm²

The Voltage Sensing Module is supplied with inserted jumper. When delivered, the neutral
point is connected to the protective conductor via the connector jumper. A current flows to
PE as a result of the voltage to be measured. This connection is removed by removing the
connector jumper. The measurement is then electrically isolated.

Figure 7-3 Internal circuit of the Voltage Sensing Module VSM10

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 239
Voltage Sensing Module VSM10
7.4 Connection example

7.4 Connection example

1) It is only possible to omit the fuses if the cables to the Voltage Sensing Module are routed so that no short-circuit or
ground fault can be expected under normal operating conditions (short-circuit proof routing).
2) Tap the line voltage as actual value for the Voltage Sensing Module VSM10 corresponding to the system design,
for example refer to the table.
3) Only one of the two terminals X521 and X522 may be used at one time!
Figure 7-4 Connection example for the VSM10 to measure the line voltage

Control Units and additional system components

240 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Voltage Sensing Module VSM10
7.4 Connection example

Table 7- 8 Suggestions for terminals and cable lugs which can be used to connect a VSM10 to the line

Conductor cross-section Connection via For components

Up to 6 mm2 Direct connection possible Smart Line Modules 5 kW and 10 kW
6 mm2 to 16 mm2 ST16-TWIN terminal blocks, Active Line Modules 16 kW
if required with a reducing jumper and ST4-TWIN Smart Line Modules 16 kW
or ST2.5-TWIN Active Interface Module 16 kW
(Phoenix Contact company)
16 mm2 to 50 mm2 AGK10 UKH tap-off terminals with UKH terminals Active Line Modules 36 kW and 55 kW
(Phoenix Contact company) Smart Line Modules 36 kW and 55 kW
Active Interface Module 36 kW and 55 kW
> 50 mm2 Ring cable lug DIN 46234-8-2.5 Components with M8 connection bolts
Intermediate high-current connector, Active Line Modules 55 kW, 80 kW, and
type UHV (Phoenix Contact) and ring cable lug 120 kW
DIN 46234-8-2.5 Active Interface Module 80 kW and 120 kW

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 241
Voltage Sensing Module VSM10
7.5 Meaning of the LED

7.5 Meaning of the LED

Table 7- 9 Meanings of the LEDs on the Voltage Sensing Module VSM10

LED Color Status Description, cause Remedy

READY – Off The electronics power supply is missing or outside the –
permissible tolerance range.
Green Continuou The component is ready for operation. Cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ –
s light communication is taking place.
Orange Continuou DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established. –
s light
Red Continuou This component has at least one fault. Remove and
s light Note: acknowledge the fault.
LED is controlled irrespective of the corresponding
messages being reconfigured.
Green/red Flashing Firmware is being downloaded. –
light 0.5
Hz
Flashing Firmware download has been completed. The system waits Carry out a POWER
light 2 Hz for POWER ON. ON.
Green/ Flashing Component recognition via LED is activated1). –
orange light Note:
or Both options depend on the LED status when component
Red/ recognition is activated.
orange
1) See SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual for the parameters to activate the recognition of components via LED

Cause and rectification of faults

The following documents contain information about the cause of faults and how they can be
rectified:
SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual (IH1)
SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual (LH1)

Control Units and additional system components

242 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Voltage Sensing Module VSM10
7.6 Dimension drawing

7.6 Dimension drawing

Figure 7-5 Dimension drawing of the Voltage Sensing Module VSM10, all data in mm and (inches)

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 243
Voltage Sensing Module VSM10
7.7 Installation

7.7 Installation

Installation
1. Tilt the component backwards slightly and attach it to the DIN rail using the hooks.
2. Swivel the component onto the DIN rail until you hear the mounting slide at the rear latch
into position.
3. Slide the components along the mounting rail to either the left or right up to their final
position.

Removal
1. First shift the mounting slide downwards at the lug to release the interlocking with the
mounting rail.
2. Swivel the component to the front and withdraw it upwards from the DIN rail.

① Mounting slide
② Mounting rail
Figure 7-6 Removing from a DIN mounting rail

Control Units and additional system components

244 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Voltage Sensing Module VSM10
7.8 Protective conductor connection and shield support

7.8 Protective conductor connection and shield support

The following shield connection clamps can be used on the bottom part of the component
housing for shield connection of the analog inputs:

Shield connection clamp Order number

Phoenix Contact SK8 3025163
Phoenix Contact SK14 3025176
Phoenix Contact SK20 3025189
Weidmüller KLBÜ CO1 1753311001

The following pictures show the shield contacts with a shield connection clamp from
Weidmüller.

① Protective conductor connection M4 / 1.8 Nm

② Shield connection terminal, Weidmüller company, type: KLBÜ CO1, order number:
1753311001

Figure 7-7 Shield support and protective conductor connection at the VSM10

NOTICE
Damage or faulty operation due to incorrect shielding or inadmissible cable lengths
If the correct shielding procedures or the permissible cable lengths are not observed, it can
cause damage or the machine may malfunction.
• Only use shielded cables.
• Do not exceed the cable lengths stated in the technical data.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 245
Voltage Sensing Module VSM10
7.9 Operation on an isolated-neutral system (IT system)

7.9 Operation on an isolated-neutral system (IT system)

When using a Voltage Sensing Module on an insulated line supply (IT supply system),
remove the connector jumper in terminal X530 at the lower side of the component.
Use two screwdrivers or a suitable tool in order to relieve the holding springs in the terminal
and then withdraw the connector jumper.

Terminal X530 with connector jumper Relieve the springs and withdraw the connector
jumper

7.10 Technical data

Table 7- 10 Technical data

6SL3053-0AA00-3AA1 Unit Value

Electronics power supply
Voltage VDC 24 (20,4 … 28,8)
Current (without DRIVE-CLiQ) ADC 0,3
Power loss W < 10
PE/ground connection At the housing with M4/1.8 Nm screw
Weight kg 1
Degree of protection IP20

Control Units and additional system components

246 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Voltage Sensing Module VSM10
7.11 Service and maintenance

7.11 Service and maintenance

Replacing the Voltage Sensing Module VSM10 in Smart Line Modules Chassis and Active Interface
Modules Chassis
When using a Voltage Sensing Module VSM10 in an Active Interface Module Chassis or
Smart Line Module Chassis, it is essential that you observe the following application cases:
1. Replacing a VSM10 with order number 6SL3053-0AA00-3AA0 by a VSM10 with order
number 6SL3053-0AA00-3AA1:
It is NOT permissible that the connector jumper ① at terminal X530 at the lower side of
the VSM10 is removed!

2. Replacing a VSM10 with order number 6SL3053-0AA00-3AA1 by a VSM10 with order

number 6SL3053-0AA00-3AA1:
Proceed with the connector jumper ① at terminal X530 of the new VSM10 (spare part)
just the same as at the previously installed VSM10.

DANGER
Danger to life due to electric shock when incorrectly replacing spare parts
If you remove the connector jumper at terminal X530 when replacing a VSM10 with order
number 6SL3053-0AA00-3AA0 by a VSM10 with order number 6SL3053-0AA00-3AA1,
then a hazardous voltage is present in the Active Interface Module Chassis or Smart Line
Module Chassis. Death or serious injury can result when live parts are touched.
• When replacing the VSM10 proceed as specified above.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 247
Voltage Sensing Module VSM10
7.11 Service and maintenance

Control Units and additional system components

248 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
Encoder system connection 8
8.1 Introduction
The encoder system should be connected to SINAMICS S120 via DRIVE-CLiQ.
Motors with DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces (e.g. synchronous motors 1FK7 and 1FT7, and induction
motors 1PH7 and 1PH8) are designed for this purpose. These motors simplify
commissioning and diagnostics because the motor and encoder type are identified
automatically.

Motors and external encoders without DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Motors without DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces, as well as external encoders without integrated
DRIVE-CLiQ interface, must be connected via Sensor Modules to enable the encoder and
temperature signals to be evaluated. Sensor Modules Cabinet-Mounted (SMC) are available
for installation in control cabinets and Sensor Modules External (SME) for installation outside
control cabinets.
If not otherwise specified, only one encoder system can be connected to each Sensor
Module.

Motors and external encoders with DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Motors with DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces can be connected to the associated Motor Module
directly via the MOTION-CONNECT DRIVE-CLiQ cables available. The connection of the
MOTION-CONNECT DRIVE-CLiQ cable at the motor has degree of protection IP67.
The DRIVE-CLiQ interface supplies the motor encoder via the integrated 24 V DC supply
and transfers the motor encoder and temperature signals and the electronic rating plate
data, such as a unique identification number, rated data (voltage, current, torque) directly to
the Control Unit. Different encoder cables are therefore no longer required for the various
encoder types, e.g. resolvers or absolute encoders. Wiring can be effected throughout with a
MOTION-CONNECT DRIVE-CLiQ cable.

DRIVE-CLiQ encoder
A DRIVE-CLiQ encoder is an absolute encoder with integrated DRIVE-CLiQ interface (see
Chapter DRIVE-CLiQ encoder (Page 339)).

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 249
Encoder system connection
8.2 Overview of Sensor Modules

8.2 Overview of Sensor Modules

Sensor Modules Cabinet-Mounted (SMC)

Sensor Modules Cabinet-Mounted SMC10, SMC20, SMC30 and SMC40 can be ordered and
configured separately. They are used when a motor with a DRIVE-CLiQ interface is not
available or when external encoders in addition to the motor encoder are required. Only one
encoder system may be connected to the Sensor Modules Cabinet-Mounted SMC10,
SMC20 and SMC30. The SMC40 supports two encoder systems. The Sensor Modules
Cabinet-Mounted evaluate these measuring systems and convert the calculated values to
DRIVE-CLiQ. Motor or encoder data are not saved.

Note
The Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted supplies the power to the encoder; however, the
Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted must be provided separately with 24 V DC.

Figure 8-1 Overview of Sensor Modules Cabinet-Mounted (SMC)

Sensor Modules External (SME)

The Sensor Modules External SME20, SME25, SME120, and SME125 are only intended for
use on machines (in North America, in accordance with the NFPA 79 "Electrical Standard for
Industrial Machinery"). It is not permissible to connect DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces to other
networks, e.g. Ethernet, but only to the DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces of the components.
Direct encoder systems outside the cabinet can be connected to the Sensor Modules
External. The Sensor Modules External evaluate these encoder systems and convert the
calculated values to DRIVE-CLiQ. No motor or encoder data is stored in the Sensor Modules
External.

Note
The Sensor Module External provides the encoder power supply. The power supply for the
Sensor Module External is provided from the connected DRIVE-CLiQ cable. This fact must
be taken into consideration when the DRIVE-CLiQ cable is selected.

Control Units and additional system components

250 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.2 Overview of Sensor Modules

The Sensor Modules External have a higher degree of protection (IP67) and are therefore
suitable for installation outside the cabinet.

Figure 8-2 Overview of Sensor Modules External (SME)

Connectable encoder systems

Table 8- 1 Overview of the connectable encoder systems

SMC SME
Encoder systems SMC10 SMC20 SMC30 SMC40 SME20 SME25 SME120 SME125
Resolver Yes - - - - - - -
Incremental encoder sin/cos (1 - Yes - - Yes - Yes -
Vpp)
with/without reference signal
Incremental encoder TTL / HTL - - Yes - - - - -
Absolute encoder EnDat 2.11) - Yes - - - Yes - Yes
Absolute encoder EnDat 2.22) - - - Yes - - - -
Absolute encoder SSI - Yes 3) Yes 4) - - Yes 3) - Yes 3)
Temperature evaluation Yes Yes Yes - Yes 5) - Yes Yes
(protecti (protecti
ve ve
electrical electrical
separati separati
on) on)
1) Absolute encoders EnDat 2.2 with order designation 02 can also be connected
2) Absolute encoders EnDat 2.2 with order designation 22 can be connected, absolute encoders EnDat 2.2 with order
designation 02 cannot be connected
3) Only possible for SSI encoders with 5 V supply
4) Possible for SSI encoders with 5 V or 24 V supply
5) With specified 6FX8002-2CA88 adapter cable

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 251
Encoder system connection
8.3 Safety instructions for Sensor Modules and encoders

8.3 Safety instructions for Sensor Modules and encoders

WARNING
Danger to life if the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks are not carefully
observed
If the fundamental safety instructions and remaining risks in Chapter 1 (Page 19) are not
observed, accidents involving severe injuries or death may occur.
• Adhere to the fundamental safety instructions.
• When assessing the risk, take into account remaining risks.

WARNING
Danger to life due to fire if overheating occurs because of insufficient ventilation clearances
Inadequate ventilation clearances can cause overheating of components with subsequent
fire and smoke. This can cause severe injury or even death. This can also result in
increased downtime and reduced service lives for devices/systems.
• For this reason, it is imperative that you maintain the 50 mm clearances above and
below the Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted.

Note
Risk of encoder failures by encoder signal disturbances
Unfavorable material combinations generate static electricity between the belt pulley and the
belt. This electrostatic charge (several kV) can discharge via the motor shaft and the
encoder which leads to disturbance of the encoder signals (encoder error).
• Use an antistatic version of the belt (special conductive polyurethane mixture).

WARNING
Danger to life due to electric shock when disconnecting and connecting encoder cables
during operation
When opening plug connections in operation, arcs can result in severe injury or death.
• Only disconnect or connect the encoder cables to Siemens motors in a voltage-free
state if hot-plugging has not been specifically released. When using direct measuring
systems (third-party encoders), ask the manufacturer whether it is permissible to
disconnect/connect under voltage.

Control Units and additional system components

252 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.3 Safety instructions for Sensor Modules and encoders

NOTICE
Damage when connecting an impermissible number of encoder systems
If more than the maximum permissible number of encoder systems are connected to a
Sensor Module, this will cause damage.
• At a Sensor Module only connect the maximum permissible number of encoder
systems.
– Sensor Modules SMC10, SMC20 and SMC30: Single-encoder system
– Sensor Module SMC40: Two-encoder systems
– Sensor Modules SMEx: Single-encoder system

Note
Diminished level of interference immunity due to equalizing currents via the electronics
ground
Ensure that there are no electrical connections between the encoder system housing and the
signal cables, or the encoder system electronics.
If this is not carefully observed, under certain circumstances the system will not be able to
reach the required interference immunity level (there is then a danger of equalization
currents flowing through the electronics ground).

NOTICE
Damage through use of incorrect DRIVE-CLiQ cables
Damage or malfunctions can occur on the devices or system when incorrect or unreleased
DRIVE-CLiQ cables are used.
• Only use suitable DRIVE-CLiQ cables that have been released by Siemens for the
respective application.

Note
Function equipotential bonding for distributed DRIVE-CLiQ nodes
Integrate all of the components that are connected via DRIVE-CLiQ in the functional
equipotential bonding concept. The connection should be preferably established by mounting
on metallic bare machine and plant components that are connected with one another using
an equipotential bonding conductor.
Alternatively, you can establish equipotential bonding using a conductor (min. 6 mm²), which
as far as possible, is routed in parallel to the DRIVE-CLiQ cable. This applies to all
distributed DRIVE-CLiQ nodes such as DM20, SME2x, SME12x, etc.

Note
Malfunctions due to polluted DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces
Malfunctions can occur in the system through the use of polluted DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces.
• Cover unused DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces with the supplied blanking covers.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 253
Encoder system connection
8.3 Safety instructions for Sensor Modules and encoders

Note
The safety information on the Sensor Module must be observed.
After the product has served its lifetime, the individual parts should be disposed of in
compliance with local regulations.

Control Units and additional system components

254 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.4 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10

8.4 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10

8.4.1 Description
The Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10 evaluates encoder signals and transmits the
speed, actual position value, rotor position and, if necessary, the motor temperature via
DRIVE-CLiQ to the Control Unit.
The SMC10 is used to evaluate sensor signals from resolvers.

8.4.2 Interface description

8.4.2.1 Overview

Figure 8-3 Interface overview for the SMC10

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 255
Encoder system connection
8.4 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10

8.4.2.2 X500 DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Table 8- 2 X500: DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A Reserved, do not use
B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Connector DRIVE-CLiQ socket
type

The blanking cover for the DRIVE-CLiQ port is included in the scope of delivery.
Blanking covers (50 x) Order number: 6SL3066-4CA00-0AA0

Control Units and additional system components

256 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.4 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10

8.4.2.3 X520 encoder system interface

Table 8- 3 X520: Encoder system interface

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 Reserved, do not use
2 Reserved, do not use
3 S2 Resolver signal A (sin+)
4 S4 Inverted resolver signal A (sin-)
5 Ground Ground (for internal shield)
6 S1 Resolver signal B (cos+)
7 S3 Inverted resolver signal B (cos-)
8 Ground Ground (for internal shield)
9 R1 Resolver excitation positive
10 Reserved, do not use
11 R2 Resolver excitation negative
12 Reserved, do not use
13 + Temp1) Motor temperature sensing KTY84-1C130 (KTY+)
Temperature sensor KTY84-1C130 / PTC
14 Reserved, do not use
15 Reserved, do not use
16 Reserved, do not use
17 Reserved, do not use
18 Reserved, do not use
19 Reserved, do not use
20 Reserved, do not use
21 Reserved, do not use
22 Reserved, do not use
23 Reserved, do not use
24 Ground Ground (for internal shield)
25 - Temp 1) Motor temperature sensing KTY84-1C130 (KTY-)
Temperature sensor KTY84-1C130 / PTC
Connector type: 25-pin SUB D connector
Measuring current via temperature sensor connection: 2 mA
1) Accuracy of temperature measurement:
- KTY: ±7°C (including evaluation)
- PTC: ±5℃ (including evaluation)

NOTICE
Damage to motor in the event of incorrectly connected KTY temperature sensor
A KTY temperature sensor connected with incorrect polarity cannot detect if the motor
overheats. Overheating can cause damage to the motor.
• Connect a KTY temperature sensor with the correct polarity.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 257
Encoder system connection
8.4 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10

WARNING
Danger to life due to electric shock in the event of voltage flashovers at the temperature
sensor
Voltage flashovers in the signal electronics can occur in motors without safe electrical
separation of the temperature sensors.
• Use temperature sensors that fully comply with the specifications of the safety isolation.
• If safe electrical separation cannot be guaranteed (for linear motors or third-party
motors, for example), use a Sensor Module External (SME120 or SME125) or Terminal
Module TM120.

8.4.2.4 X524 Electronics power supply

Table 8- 4 X524: Electronics power supply

Terminal Function Technical data

+ Electronics power supply Voltage: 24 V (20.4 … 28.8 V)
+ Electronics power supply Current consumption: max. 0.35 A
M Electronics ground Max. current via jumper in connector:
20 A (15 A according to UL/CSA)
M Electronics ground

Type: Screw terminal 2 (Page 360)

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 2.5 mm²

The maximum cable length that can be connected is 10 m.

Note
The two "+" or "M" terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures that the supply
voltage is looped through.

Control Units and additional system components

258 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.4 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10

8.4.3 Connection example

Figure 8-4 Connection of an encoder system via a Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted (SMC) for a
motor without a DRIVE-CLiQ interface

8.4.4 Meaning of the LED

Table 8- 5 Meaning of the LED on the Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10

LED Color Status Description, cause Remedy

RDY - Off The electronics power supply is missing or outside the –
READY permissible tolerance range.
Green Continuous The component is ready for operation. Cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ –
light communication is taking place.
Orange Continuous DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established. –
light
Red Continuous This component has at least one fault. Remove and
light Note: acknowledge the fault.
The LED is activated regardless of whether the
corresponding messages have been reconfigured.
Green/re Flashing Firmware is being downloaded. –
d light 0.5 Hz
Flashing Firmware download is complete. The system waits for Carry out a POWER
light 2 Hz POWER ON. ON.
Green/or Flashing Component recognition via LED is activated1). –
ange light Note:
or Both options depend on the LED status when component
Red/oran recognition is activated.
ge
1) See SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual for the parameters to activate the recognition of components via LED

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 259
Encoder system connection
8.4 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10

Cause and rectification of faults

The following documents contain information about the cause of faults and how they can be
rectified:
SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual (IH1)
SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual (LH1)

8.4.5 Dimension drawing

Figure 8-5 Dimension drawing of the Sensor Module Cabinet SMC10, all dimensions in mm and
(inches)

Control Units and additional system components

260 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.4 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10

8.4.6 Mounting

Installation
1. Tilt the component backwards slightly and attach it to the DIN rail using the hooks.
2. Swivel the component onto the DIN rail until you hear the mounting slide at the rear latch
into position.
3. Slide the components along the mounting rail to either the left or right up to their final
position.

Removal
1. First shift the mounting slide downwards at the lug to release the interlocking with the
mounting rail.
2. Swivel the component to the front and withdraw it upwards from the DIN rail.

① Mounting slide
② Mounting rail
Figure 8-6 Removing from a DIN mounting rail

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 261
Encoder system connection
8.4 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10

8.4.7 Technical data

Table 8- 6 Technical data

6SL3055-0AA00-5AAx Unit Value

Electronics power supply
Voltage VDC 24 (20,4 … 28,8)
Current (without encoder system) ADC ≤ 0,20
Current (with encoder system) ADC ≤ 0,35
Power loss W ≤ 10
Specification
Transformation ratio of the resolver (ü) 0,5
Excitation voltage on the SMC10 when ü=0.5 Vrms 4,1
Amplitude monitoring threshold (secondary Vrms 1
tracks) of the SMC10
Excitation voltage (cannot be parameterized) Vrms 4,1
Excitation frequency (synchronized to the current kHz 5 to 16
controller clock cycle)
PE/ground connection At the housing with M4/1.8 Nm screw
Max. encoder cable length m 130
Weight kg 0,45
Degree of protection IP20 or IPXXB

Table 8- 7 Max. frequency that can be evaluated (speed)

Resolver Max. speed resolver / motor

Number of Number of 8 kHz/125 μsec 4 kHz/250 μsec 2 kHz/500 μsec
poles pole pairs
2-pole 1 120000 rpm 60000 rpm 30000 rpm
4-pole 2 60000 rpm 30000 rpm 15000 rpm
6-pole 3 40000 rpm 20000 rpm 10000 rpm
8-pole 4 30000 rpm 15000 rpm 7500 rpm

Control Units and additional system components

262 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.4 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10

The ratio between the ohmic resistance R and the inductance L (the primary winding of the
resolver) determines whether the resolver can be evaluated with the SMC10. See the
following diagram:

Figure 8-7 Connectable impedances with an excitation frequency f = 5000 Hz

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 263
Encoder system connection
8.5 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC20

8.5 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC20

8.5.1 Description
The Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC20 evaluates encoder signals and transmits the
speed, actual position value, rotor position and, if necessary, the motor temperature and
reference point via DRIVE-CLiQ to the Control Unit.
The SMC20 is used to evaluate encoder signals from incremental encoders with SIN/COS (1
Vpp) or absolute encoders with EnDat 2.1. EnDat 2.2 order designation 02 or SSI.

8.5.2 Interface description

8.5.2.1 Overview

Figure 8-8 Interface description of the SMC20

Control Units and additional system components

264 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.5 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC20

8.5.2.2 X500 DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Table 8- 8 X500: DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A Reserved, do not use
B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Connector DRIVE-CLiQ socket
type

The blanking cover for the DRIVE-CLiQ port is included in the scope of delivery.
Blanking covers (50 x) Order number: 6SL3066-4CA00-0AA0

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 265
Encoder system connection
8.5 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC20

8.5.2.3 X520 encoder system interface

Table 8- 9 X520: Encoder system interface

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 P encoder Encoder power supply
2 M encoder Ground for encoder power supply
3 A Incremental signal A
4 A* Inverse incremental signal A
5 Ground Ground (for internal shield)
6 B Incremental signal B
7 B* Inverse incremental signal B
8 Ground Ground (for internal shield)
9 Reserved, do not use
10 Clock Clock, EnDat interface, SSI clock
11 Reserved, do not use
12 Clock* Inverted clock, EnDat interface,
inverted SSI clock
13 +Temp1) Motor temperature sensing KTY84-1C130 (KTY+)
Temperature sensor KTY84-1C130 / PTC
14 P sense Sense input of encoder power supply
15 Data Data, EnDat interface,
SSI data
16 M sense Ground sense input encoder power supply
17 R Reference signal R
18 R* Inverse reference signal R
19 C Absolute track signal C
20 C* Inverse absolute track signal C
21 D Absolute track signal D
22 D* Inverse absolute track signal D
23 Data* Inverse data, EnDat interface,
Inverse SSI data
24 Ground Ground (for internal shield)
25 -Temp1) Motor temperature sensing KTY84-1C130 (KTY-)
Temperature sensor KTY84-1C130 / PTC
Connector type: 25-pin SUB D connector
Measuring current via temperature sensor connection: 2 mA
1) Accuracy of the temperature measurement:
- KTY: ±7°C (including evaluation)
- PTC: ±5℃ (including evaluation)

Control Units and additional system components

266 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.5 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC20

NOTICE
Damage to motor in the event of incorrectly connected KTY temperature sensor
A KTY temperature sensor connected with incorrect polarity cannot detect if the motor
overheats. Overheating can cause damage to the motor.
• Connect a KTY temperature sensor with the correct polarity.

WARNING
Danger to life due to electric shock in the event of voltage flashovers at the temperature
sensor
Voltage flashovers in the signal electronics can occur in motors without safe electrical
separation of the temperature sensors.
• Use temperature sensors that fully comply with the specifications of the safety isolation.
• If safe electrical separation cannot be guaranteed (for linear motors or third-party
motors, for example), use a Sensor Module External (SME120 or SME125) or Terminal
Module TM120.

8.5.2.4 X524 Electronics power supply

Table 8- 10 X524: Electronics power supply

Terminal Function Technical data

+ Electronics power supply Voltage: 24 V (20.4 … 28.8 V)
+ Electronics power supply Current consumption: max. 0.35 A
M Electronics ground Max. current via jumper in connector:
M Electronics ground 20 A (15 A according to UL/CSA)

Type: Screw terminal 2 (Page 360)

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 2.5 mm²

The maximum cable length that can be connected is 10 m.

Note
The two "+" or "M" terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures that the supply
voltage is looped through.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 267
Encoder system connection
8.5 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC20

8.5.3 Connection example

Figure 8-9 Connection of an encoder system via a Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted (SMC) for a
motor without a DRIVE-CLiQ interface

8.5.4 Meaning of the LED

Table 8- 11 Meaning of the LED on the Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC20

LED Color Status Description, cause Remedy

RDY - Off The electronics power supply is missing or outside the –
READY permissible tolerance range.
Green Continuous The component is ready for operation. Cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ –
light communication is taking place.
Orange Continuous DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established. –
light
Red Continuous This component has at least one fault. Remove and
light Note: acknowledge the
The LED is activated irrespective of whether the fault.
corresponding messages have been reconfigured.
Green / 0.5 Hz Firmware is being downloaded. –
Red flashing
light
2 Hz Firmware download is complete. The system waits for Carry out a POWER
flashing POWER ON. ON.
light
Green / Flashing Component recognition via LED is activated1). –
Orange light Note:
or Both options depend on the LED status when component
Red / recognition is activated.
Orange
1) See SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual for the parameters to activate the recognition of components via LED

Control Units and additional system components

268 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.5 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC20

Cause and rectification of faults

The following documents contain information about the cause of faults and how they can be
rectified:
SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual (IH1)
SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual (LH1)

8.5.5 Dimension drawing

Figure 8-10 Dimension drawing of the Sensor Module Cabinet SMC20, all data in mm and (inches)

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 269
Encoder system connection
8.5 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC20

8.5.6 Mounting

Installation
1. Tilt the component backwards slightly and attach it to the DIN rail using the hooks.
2. Swivel the component onto the DIN rail until you hear the mounting slide at the rear latch
into position.
3. Slide the components along the mounting rail to either the left or right up to their final
position.

Removal
1. First shift the mounting slide downwards at the lug to release the interlocking with the
mounting rail.
2. Swivel the component to the front and withdraw it upwards from the DIN rail.

① Mounting slide
② Mounting rail
Figure 8-11 Removing from a DIN mounting rail

Control Units and additional system components

270 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.5 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC20

8.5.7 Technical data

Table 8- 12 Technical data

6SL3055-0AA00-5BAx Unit Value

Electronics power supply
Voltage VDC 24 (20,4 … 28,8)
Current (without encoder system) ADC ≤ 0,20
Current (with encoder system) ADC ≤ 0,35
Power loss W ≤ 10
Encoder system power supply
Voltage VDC 5 V DC (with remote sense) 1)
Current ADC 0.35
Encoder frequency that can be evaluated kHz ≤ 500
(fencoder)
SSI baud rate 2) kBd 100 - 10003)
Max. encoder cable length m 100
PE/ground connection At the housing with M4/1.8 Nm screw
Weight kg 0,45
Degree of protection IP20 or IPXXB
1) A controller compares the encoder system supply voltage - sensed via the Remote Sense cables - with the reference
supply voltage of the encoder system, and adjusts the supply voltage for the encoder system at the output of the sensor
module until the required supply voltage is obtained directly at the encoder system (only for 5 V encoder system power
supply).
2) Only possible for SSI encoders with 5 V supply.
3) See the diagram "Maximum cable length depending on the SSI baud rate for SSI encoders"

Note
Current controller clock cycle
For a current controller clock cycle of 31.25 µs, use an SMC20 with order number 6SL3055-
0AA00-5BA3.

Figure 8-12 Maximum cable lengths depending on the SSI baud rate for SSI encoders

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 271
Encoder system connection
8.6 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

8.6 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

8.6.1 Description
The Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30 evaluates encoder signals and transmits the
speed, actual position value and, if necessary, the motor temperature and reference point via
DRIVE-CLiQ to the Control Unit.
The SMC30 is used to evaluate encoder signals from encoders with TTL, HTL, or SSI
interfaces.
A combination of TTL/HTL signal and SSI absolute signal is possible at terminals
X521/X531, if both signals are derived from the same measured variable.

8.6.2 Interface description

8.6.2.1 Overview

Figure 8-13 Interface description of the SMC30

Control Units and additional system components

272 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.6 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

8.6.2.2 X500 DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Table 8- 13 X500: DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A Reserved, do not use
B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Connector DRIVE-CLiQ socket
type

The blanking cover for the DRIVE-CLiQ port is included in the scope of delivery.
Blanking covers (50 x) Order number: 6SL3066-4CA00-0AA0

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 273
Encoder system connection
8.6 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

8.6.2.3 X520 encoder system interface

Table 8- 14 X520: Encoder system interface

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 + Temp 1) Motor temperature sensing KTY84-1C130 (KTY+)
Temperature sensor KTY84-1C130 / PTC
2 Clock SSI clock
3 Clock* Inverse SSI clock
4 P encoder 5 V / 24 V Encoder power supply
5 P encoder 5 V / 24 V
6 P sense Sense input encoder power supply
7 M encoder (M) Ground, encoder power supply
8 - Temp 1) Motor temperature sensing KTY84-1C130 (KTY-)
Temperature sensor KTY84-1C130 / PTC
9 M sense Ground sense input
10 R Reference signal R
11 R* Inverse reference signal R
12 B* Inverse incremental signal B
13 B Incremental signal B
14 A* / data* Inverted incremental signal A/inverted SSI data
15 A / data Incremental signal A/SSI data
Connector type: 15-pin Sub-D socket
Measuring current via temperature sensor connection: 2 mA
1) Accuracy of temperature measurement:
- KTY: ±7°C (including evaluation)
- PTC: ±5℃ (including evaluation)

NOTICE
Damage to the encoder due to incorrect supply voltage
The encoder supply can be parameterized to 5 V or 24 V. The sensor may be destroyed if
you enter the wrong parameters.
• Select the appropriate supply voltage.

NOTICE
Damage to motor in the event of incorrectly connected KTY temperature sensor
A KTY temperature sensor connected with incorrect polarity cannot detect if the motor
overheats. Overheating can cause damage to the motor.
• Connect a KTY temperature sensor with the correct polarity.

Control Units and additional system components

274 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.6 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

You can find information for parameterizing the KTY temperature sensor in the SINAMICS
S120 Function Manual (FH1) in Chapter "Monitoring and protective functions/thermal motor
monitoring".

WARNING
Danger to life due to electric shock in the event of voltage flashovers at the temperature
sensor
Voltage flashovers in the signal electronics can occur in motors without safe electrical
separation of the temperature sensors.
• Use temperature sensors that fully comply with the specifications of the safety isolation.
• If safe electrical separation cannot be guaranteed (for linear motors or third-party
motors, for example), use a Sensor Module External (SME120 or SME125) or Terminal
Module TM120.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 275
Encoder system connection
8.6 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

8.6.2.4 X521 / X531 alternative encoder system interface

Table 8- 15 X521/X531: Alternative encoder system interface

Pin Designation Technical data

X521 1 A Incremental signal A
2 A* Inverse incremental signal A
3 B Incremental signal B
4 B* Inverse incremental signal B
5 R Reference signal R
6 R* Inverse reference signal R
7 CTRL Control signal
8 M Ground

1 P_Encoder 5 V / 24 V Encoder power supply

2 M_Encoder Ground, encoder power supply
X531 3 - Temp 1) Motor temperature sensing KTY84-1C130 (KTY-)
Temperature sensor KTY84-1C130 / PTC
4 + Temp 1) Motor temperature sensing KTY84-1C130 (KTY+)
Temperature sensor KTY84-1C130 / PTC
5 Clock SSI clock
6 Clock* Inverse SSI clock
7 Data SSI data
8 Data* Inverse SSI data

Max. connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm2

Measuring current via the temperature sensor connection: 2 mA
When unipolar HTL encoders are used, A*, B*, and R* on the terminal block must be jumpered with M_Encoder (X531)2).
1) Accuracy of temperature measurement:
- KTY: ±7°C (including evaluation)
- PTC: ±5℃ (including evaluation)
2) Because the physical transmission media is more robust, the bipolar connection should always be used. The unipolar
connection should only be used if the encoder type does not output push-pull signals.

WARNING
Danger to life through electric shock due to unconnected cable shields
Hazardous touch voltages can occur through capacitive cross-coupling due to unconnected
cable shields.
• Attach the cable shield to the component for the encoder system connection at the
terminals.

Control Units and additional system components

276 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.6 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

Temperature sensor connection

NOTICE
Damage to motor in the event of incorrectly connected KTY temperature sensor
A KTY temperature sensor connected with incorrect polarity cannot detect if the motor
overheats. Overheating can cause damage to the motor.
• Connect a KTY temperature sensor with the correct polarity.

You can find information for parameterizing the KTY temperature sensor in the SINAMICS
S120 Function Manual (FH1) in Chapter "Monitoring and protective functions/thermal motor
monitoring".

Note
The maximum length of the temperature sensor cable is 100 m. The cables must be
shielded.

WARNING
Danger to life due to electric shock in the event of voltage flashovers at the temperature
sensor
Voltage flashovers in the signal electronics can occur in motors without safe electrical
separation of the temperature sensors.
• Use temperature sensors that fully comply with the specifications of the safety isolation.
• If safe electrical separation cannot be guaranteed (for linear motors or third-party
motors, for example), use a Sensor Module External (SME120 or SME125) or Terminal
Module TM120.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 277
Encoder system connection
8.6 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

8.6.2.5 X524 Electronics power supply

Table 8- 16 X524: Electronics power supply

Terminal Function Technical data

+ Electronics power supply Voltage: 24 V (20.4 … 28.8 V)
+ Electronics power supply Current consumption: max. 0.55 A
M Electronics ground Max. current via jumper in connector:
M Electronics ground 20 A (15 A according to UL/CSA)

Type: Screw terminal 2 (Page 360)

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 2.5 mm²

The maximum cable length that can be connected is 10 m.

Note
The two "+" or "M" terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures that the supply
voltage is looped through.

Control Units and additional system components

278 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.6 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

8.6.3 Connection examples

Connection example 1: HTL encoder, bipolar, with reference signal

Figure 8-14 Connection example 1: HTL encoder, bipolar, with reference signal

Signal cables must be twisted in pairs to improve immunity to induced noise.

Connection example 2: HTL encoder, unipolar, with reference signal

Figure 8-15 Connection example 2: HTL encoder, unipolar, with reference signal1)

1) Because the physical transmission media is more robust, the bipolar connection should
1) always be used. The unipolar connection should only be used if the encoder type does not
1) output push-pull signals.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 279
Encoder system connection
8.6 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

Figure 8-16 Photo of connection example 2: SMC30, 30 mm wide

Note: Diagram of the wire jumpers to connect unipolar HTL encoders with reference signal

Control Units and additional system components

280 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.6 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

8.6.4 Meaning of the LEDs

Table 8- 17 Meaning of LEDs on the Sensor Module Cabinet SMC30

LED Color State Description, cause Remedy

RDY – Off The electronics power supply is missing or outside the –
READY permissible tolerance range.
Green Continuou The component is ready for operation. Cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ –
s light communication is taking place.
Orange Continuou DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established. –
s light
Red Continuou This component has at least one fault. Remedy and
s light Note: acknowledge fault
LED is controlled irrespective of the corresponding
messages being reconfigured.
Green/red Flashing Firmware is being downloaded. –
light 0.5
Hz
Green/red Flashing Firmware download is complete. The system waits for Carry out a POWER
light 2 Hz POWER ON. ON
Green/ora Flashing Component recognition via LED is activated1). –
nge light Note:
or Both options depend on the LED status when component
Red/orang recognition is activated.
e
OUT > 5 – Off The electronic power supply is missing or outside –
V permissible tolerance range.
Power supply ≤ 5 V.
Orange Continuou The electronics power supply for the encoder system is –
s light available.
Power supply > 5 V
Notice
Make sure that the connected encoder can be operated with
a 24 V power supply. If an encoder that is designed for a 5 V
supply is operated with a 24 V supply, this can destroy the
encoder electronics.
1) See SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual for the parameters to activate the recognition of components via LED

Cause and rectification of faults

The following documents contain information about the cause of faults and how they can be
rectified:
SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual (IH1)
SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual (LH1)

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 281
Encoder system connection
8.6 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

8.6.5 Dimension drawing

Figure 8-17 Dimension drawing of the Sensor Module Cabinet SMC30, all data in mm and (inches)

Control Units and additional system components

282 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.6 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

8.6.6 Mounting

Installation
1. Tilt the component backwards slightly and attach it to the DIN rail using the hooks.
2. Swivel the component onto the DIN rail until you hear the mounting slide at the rear latch
into position.
3. Slide the components along the mounting rail to either the left or right up to their final
position.

Removal
1. First shift the mounting slide downwards at the lug to release the interlocking with the
mounting rail.
2. Swivel the component to the front and withdraw it upwards from the DIN rail.

① Mounting slide
② Mounting rail
Figure 8-18 Removing from a DIN mounting rail

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 283
Encoder system connection
8.6 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

8.6.7 Protective conductor connection and shield support

Shield contacts are only required if the system is connected to X521/X531.

① Protective conductor connection M4 / 1.8 Nm

② Shield connection terminal, Weidmüller company, type: KLBÜ CO1, order number:
1753311001

Figure 8-19 Shield support and protective conductor connection

The bending radii of the cables must be taken into account (see MOTION-CONNECT
description).

NOTICE
Damage or faulty operation due to incorrect shielding or inadmissible cable lengths
If the correct shielding procedures or the permissible cable lengths are not observed, it can
cause damage or the machine may malfunction.
• Only use shielded cables.
• Do not exceed the cable lengths stated in the technical data.

Control Units and additional system components

284 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.6 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

8.6.8 Technical data

Table 8- 18 Technical data

6SL3055-0AA00-5CA2 Unit Value

Electronics power supply
Voltage VDC 24 (20,4 … 28,8)
Current (without encoder system) ADC ≤ 0,20
Current (with encoder system) ADC ≤ 0,55
Power loss W ≤ 10
Encoder system power supply
Voltage VDC 5 (with or without remote sense) 1) or VDC - 1 V
Current ADC 0.35
Encoder frequency that can be evaluated kHz ≤ 300
(fencoder)
SSI baud rate kBd 100 - 10002)
PE/ground connection At the housing with M4/1.8 Nm screw
Weight 0,45
Degree of protection IP20 or IPXXB
1) A controller compares the encoder system supply voltage - sensed via the Remote Sense cables - with the reference
supply voltage of the encoder system, and adjusts the supply voltage for the encoder system at the output of the sensor
module until the required supply voltage is obtained directly at the encoder system (only for 5 V encoder system power
supply). Remote Sense only to X520.
2) See the diagram "Maximum cable length depending on the SSI baud rate for SSI encoders"

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 285
Encoder system connection
8.6 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

Connectable encoder systems

Table 8- 19 Specification of encoder systems that can be connected

Parameter Designation Threshold Min. Max. Unit

High signal level UHdiff 2 5 V
(TTL bipolar at X520 or X521/X531) 1)
Low signal level ULdiff -5 -2 V
(TTL bipolar at X520 or X521/X531)1)
High signal level UH3) High 17 VCC V
(HTL unipolar) Low 10 VCC V
Low signal level UL3) High 0 7 V
(HTL unipolar) Low 0 2 V
High signal level UHdiff 3 VCC V
(HTL bipolar)2)
Low signal level ULdiff -VCC -3 V
(HTL bipolar) 2)
High signal level UHdiff 2 5 V
(SSI bipolar at X520 or X521/X531) 1)
Low signal level ULdiff -5 -2 V
(SSI bipolar at X520 or X521/X531)1)
Signal frequency fS - 300 kHz
Edge clearance tmin 100 - ns
"Zero pulse inactive time" tLo 640 (tALo-BHi - tHi)/24) ns
(before and after A=B=high)
"Zero pulse active time" tHi 640 tALo-BHi - 2*tLo 4) ns
(while A=B=high and beyond) 5)
1) Other signal levels according to the RS 422 standard.
2) The absolute level of the individual signals varies between 0 V and VCC of the encoder system.
3) Only with order number 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA2 and firmware version 2.5 SP1 or higher can this value be configured
using software. For older firmware releases and Order Nos. less than 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA2 then the "low" threshold
applies.
4) tALo-BHi is not a specified value, but is the time between the falling edge of track A and the next but one rising edge of
track B.
5) Additional information on setting the "Zero pulse active time" can be found in the manual: SINAMICS S120, Function
Manual, tolerant encoder monitoring for SMC30

Control Units and additional system components

286 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.6 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

Table 8- 20 Encoders that can be connected

X520 X521 X531 Track Remote Sense2)

(SUB-D) (terminal) (terminal) monitoring
HTL bipolar 24 V Yes Yes Yes no
HTL unipolar 24 V 1) Yes Yes (however, a bipolar no no
connection is recommended)1)
TTL bipolar 24 V Yes Yes Yes no
TTL bipolar 5 V Yes Yes Yes At X520
SSI 24 V/5 V Yes Yes no no
TTL unipolar no
1) Because the physical transmission media is more robust, the bipolar connection should always be used. The unipolar
connection should only be used if the encoder type does not output push-pull signals.
2) A controller compares the encoder system supply voltage - sensed via the Remote Sense cables - with the reference
supply voltage of the encoder system, and adjusts the supply voltage for the encoder system at the output of the sensor
module until the required supply voltage is obtained directly at the encoder system (only for 5 V encoder system power
supply).

Maximum encoder cable lengths

Table 8- 21 Maximum encoder cable length

Encoder type Maximum encoder cable length in m

TTL1) 100
HTL unipolar2) 100
HTL bipolar 300
SSI 1003)
1) For TTL encoders at X520 → remote sense → 100 m
2) Because the physical transmission media is more robust, the bipolar connection should always be
used. The unipolar connection should only be used if the encoder type does not output push-pull
signals.
3) See the diagram "Maximum cable length depending on the SSI baud rate for SSI encoders"

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 287
Encoder system connection
8.6 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

SSI encoder

Figure 8-20 Maximum cable lengths depending on the SSI baud rate for SSI encoders

Encoders with 5 V supply connected to X521/X531

For encoders with a 5 V supply at X521/X531, the cable length depends on the encoder
current (for 0.5 mm2 cable cross-sections):

Figure 8-21 Max. cable length as a function of the encoder current drawn

Control Units and additional system components

288 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.6 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30

Encoders without remote sense

For encoders without Remote Sense, the permissible cable length is restricted to 100 m.
Reason: The voltage drop depends on the cable length and the encoder current.

Figure 8-22 Signal characteristic of track A and track B between two edges: Time between two edges
with pulse encoders

Figure 8-23 Position of the zero pulse to the track signals

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 289
Encoder system connection
8.7 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC40

8.7 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC40

8.7.1 Description
The Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC40 is used to convert encoder signals from
absolute encoders with EnDat 2.2 Order number 22 to DRIVE-CLiQ and send these to the
Control Unit. Two encoder systems with EnDat 2.2 Order number 22 can be connected to
the SMC40. Their signals are converted independent of each other to two DRIVE-CLiQ
encoder signals.

Note
Permissible encoders
• Only use absolute encoders EnDat 2.2 with order designation 22. Do not connect any
EnDat 2.2 absolute encoders with order designation 02.
• Only use absolute encoders (not incremental encoders) with software versions 4.5 and
4.6.
• Do not use any battery buffered encoders, such as EBI 1135.

Configuration and commissioning

To make sure that the Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC40 is integrated into the
topology during first commissioning, you must absolutely observe the following connection
conditions:
● Connect at least one of the DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces X500/1 or X500/2 on the SMC40
using DRIVE-CLiQ.
● Connect one EnDat encoder to the corresponding encoder interface X520/1 (to X500/1)
or X520/2 (to X500/2).
● Operate the SMC40 only in a star topology. The DRIVE-CLiQ sockets X500/1 and X500/2
can not be used for a series connection.

Note
Later, the SMC40 is integrated into the actual topology only, if the DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces
X500/x and the corresponding encoder interfaces X520/x are assigned. Without a connected
encoder, it is not possible to subsequently integrate the SMC40 into the topology.

Temperature signals
If the EnDat2.2 encoder already evaluates the temperature, the temperature signals can be
transferred through the SMC40 via DRIVE-CLiQ.

Control Units and additional system components

290 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.7 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC40

8.7.2 Interface descriptions

8.7.2.1 Overview

Figure 8-24 Interface overview for the SMC40

Interface assignment
The DRIVE-CLiQ and encoder interfaces of channel 1 and channel 2 are logically completely
independently of one another and permanently assigned.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 291
Encoder system connection
8.7 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC40

X500/1 X500/2 Left RDY LED Right RDY LED

DRIVE-CLiQ DRIVE-CLiQ
socket socket
X520/1 EnDat 2.2 input channel 1 --- channel 1 ---
X520/2 EnDat 2.2 input --- channel 2 --- channel 2

Connector X524 for the electronics power supply is used for both channels.

8.7.2.2 X500/1 and X500/2 DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces

Table 8- 22 X500/1 and X500/2: DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A Reserved, do not use
B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Connector DRIVE-CLiQ socket
type

The blanking covers for the DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces are included in the scope of delivery.
Blanking covers (50 x) Order number: 6SL3066-4CA00-0AA0

Note
The maximum DRIVE-CLiQ cable length is 30 m.

Control Units and additional system components

292 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.7 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC40

8.7.2.3 X520/1 and X520/2 encoder system interfaces

Table 8- 23 X520/1 and X520/2: Encoder system interfaces

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 P encoder Encoder power supply
2 M encoder Ground, encoder power supply
3 Reserved, do not use
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Data Data, EnDat interface
6 Reserved, do not use
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Data* Inverse data EnDat interface
9 P encoder Encoder power supply
10 Reserved, do not use
11 M encoder Ground, encoder power supply
12 Reserved, do not use
13 Reserved, do not use
14 Clock Clock, EnDat interface
15 Clock* Inverse clock EnDat interface
Connector 15-pin SUB D connector
type:

Note
The maximum cable length to encoder systems is 100 m. The specified supply voltage of the
encoder must be observed.

Note
Pins 1/9 and 2/11 on the SMC40 side and on the encoder side (in the M12 connector, pin 8/2
and pin 5/1) are connected in parallel, and to increase the cable cross-section each must be
wired with a separate conductor.

WARNING
Danger to life due to electric shock in the event of voltage flashovers at the temperature
sensor
Voltage flashovers in the signal electronics can occur in motors without safe electrical
separation of the temperature sensors.
• Use temperature sensors that fully comply with the specifications of the safety isolation.
• If safe electrical separation cannot be guaranteed (for linear motors or third-party
motors, for example), use a Terminal Module TM120.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 293
Encoder system connection
8.7 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC40

8.7.2.4 X524 Electronics power supply

Table 8- 24 X524: Electronics power supply

Terminal Function Technical data

+ Electronics power supply Voltage: 24 V (20.4 … 28.8 V)
+ Electronics power supply Current consumption: max. 0.35 A
M Electronics ground Maximum current via jumper in
M Electronics ground connector: 20 A (15 A according to
UL/CSA)
Type: Screw terminal 2 (Page 360)
Max. cross-section that can be connected: 2.5 mm²

The maximum cable length that can be connected is 10 m.

Note
The maximum cable length for the electronics power supply is 30 m.

Note
The two "+" or "M" terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures that the supply
voltage is looped through.

Control Units and additional system components

294 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.7 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC40

8.7.3 Connection example

Figure 8-25 Encoder system connection via a Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC40

The wiring diagram shows two different applications of the SMC40. For each conversion of
an EnDat 2.2 encoder signal into a DRIVE-CLiQ signal, a dedicated DRIVE-CLiQ cable must
be used, as the electronics in the SMC40 is designed so that each channel is independent.
The DRIVE-CLiQ cables cannot be interchanged.

Connecting a standard motor with brake and optical encoder

A standard motor with gearbox for a rotary indexing table drive is shown in the connection
example. The rotary indexing table has an angular position measuring system with EnDat
2.2 interface. The measured angular data are transferred via EnDat 2.2 to the SMC40 and
from there via DRIVE-CLiQ to the Control Unit.
The motor contains an integrated encoder and temperature evaluation, which transfers data
via DRIVE-CLiQ directly to the Motor Module.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 295
Encoder system connection
8.7 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC40

Connecting a linear motor without DRIVE-CLiQ interface

From a linear motor with linear scale, velocity and position are first transferred via the EnDat
2.2 connection to the SMC40 and from there, via DRIVE-CLiQ to a Terminal Module TM120.
The temperature sensors of the linear motor supply their analog temperature values directly
to the TM120, which guarantees the safe electrical separation of the temperature cable and
which transfers the temperature data together with the velocity and position data in the
DRIVE-CLiQ protocol to the Motor Module.

8.7.4 Meaning of the LEDs

Table 8- 25 Meaning of the LEDs on the Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC40

LED Color Status Description, cause Remedy

RDY – Off The electronics power supply is missing or outside the –
READY permissible tolerance range.
Green Continuou The component is ready for operation. Cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ –
s light communication is taking place.
Orange Continuou DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established. –
s light
Red Continuou This component has at least one fault. Remove and
s light Note: acknowledge the fault.
LED is controlled irrespective of the corresponding
messages being reconfigured.
Green/red Flashing Firmware download has been completed. The system waits Carry out a POWER
light for POWER ON. ON.
2 Hz
Green/ Flashing Component recognition via LED is activated1). –
orange light Note:
or Both options depend on the LED status when component
Red/ recognition is activated.
orange
1) See SINAMICS S120/150 List Manual for the parameters to activate the recognition of components via LED

Each channel has a multifunction LED.

Cause and rectification of faults

The following documents contain information about the cause of faults and how they can be
rectified:
SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual (IH1)
SINAMICS S120/S150 List Manual (LH1)

Control Units and additional system components

296 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.7 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC40

8.7.5 Dimension drawing

Figure 8-26 Dimension drawing of the Sensor Module Cabinet SMC40, all data in mm and (inches)

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 297
Encoder system connection
8.7 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC40

8.7.6 Installation

Installation
1. Tilt the component backwards slightly and attach it to the DIN rail using the hooks.
2. Swivel the component onto the DIN rail until you hear the mounting slide at the rear latch
into position.
3. Slide the components along the mounting rail to either the left or right up to their final
position.

Removal
1. First shift the mounting slide downwards at the lug to release the interlocking with the
mounting rail.
2. Swivel the component to the front and withdraw it upwards from the DIN rail.

① Mounting slide
② Mounting rail
Figure 8-27 Removing from a DIN mounting rail

Control Units and additional system components

298 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.7 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC40

Mounting clearances
The SMC40 can be installed in the line-up together with other SMC as required. When
mounting next to heat sources, the following minimum lateral clearances must be observed:
● 50 mm for Line Modules and Motor Modules
● 100 mm for hotter components (e.g. pulsed resistor)

8.7.7 Technical data

Table 8- 26 Technical data

6SL3055-0AA00-5DA0 Unit Value

Electronics power supply
Voltage VDC 24 (20,4 … 28,8)
Current (without encoder system) ADC ≤ 0,10
Current (with encoder system) ADC ≤ 0,35
Power loss W ≤4
Encoder system power supply
Voltage VDC 5.1 (without Remote Sense)
Current ADC 0.5
Evaluable encoder protocol EnDat 2.2 with order designation 22
Max. encoder cable length m 100
PE/ground connection At the housing with M4/1.8 Nm screw
Weight kg 0,45
Degree of protection IP20 or IPXXB

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 299
Encoder system connection
8.8 Sensor Module External SME20

8.8 Sensor Module External SME20

8.8.1 Description
Direct encoder systems outside the cabinet can be connected to the Sensor Module External
SME20. The SME20 evaluates these encoder systems and converts the calculated values to
DRIVE-CLiQ.
Incremental direct encoder systems with SIN/COS (1 Vpp) and reference signal can be
connected.
It is possible to connect a motor with a 17-pole circular connector for the encoder to the 12-
pole circular connector of the SME20 using adapter cable 6FX 8002-2CA88-xxxx.
● KTY/PTC temperature sensors can be used for evaluation of the motor temperature.
● The Sensor Module is only suitable for motors without absolute track signals (C/D track):
– Induction motors (e.g. 1PH)
– Synchronous motors with pole position identification (e.g. 1FN, 1FW, 1FE)
Neither motor nor encoder data are saved in the SME20.

8.8.2 Interface description

8.8.2.1 Overview

Figure 8-28 Interface description SME20

Control Units and additional system components

300 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.8 Sensor Module External SME20

8.8.2.2 DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Table 8- 27 DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) Power supply
B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Connector DRIVE-CLiQ socket
type
Power consumption max. 0.25 A

The blanking cover for the DRIVE-CLiQ port to secure the degree of protection IP 67 is not included in
the scope of delivery.
Blanking covers (6 pcs) order number: 6SL3066-4CA01-0AA0

Note
Only MOTION-CONNECT DRIVE-CLiQ cables may be used for connections. The maximum
cable length is 100 m for MOTION-CONNECT 500, and 75 m for MOTION-CONNECT
800PLUS cables.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 301
Encoder system connection
8.8 Sensor Module External SME20

8.8.2.3 Encoder system interface

Table 8- 28 Encoder system interface SME20

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 B* Inverse incremental signal B
2 P5 Encoder power supply
3 R Reference signal R
4 R* Inverse reference signal R
5 A Incremental signal A
6 A* Inverse incremental signal A
7 -Temp1) 2) Temperature sensor connection3)
KTY84-1C130 or PTC
8 B Incremental signal B
9 +Temp1) 2) Temperature sensor connection3)
KTY84-1C130 or PTC
10 M Ground for encoder power supply
11 M Ground for encoder power supply
12 P5 Encoder power supply
Connector kit: 12-pin, order number: 6FX2003-0SA12
Measuring current via temperature sensor connection: 2 mA
Blanking cover for encoder system interface: Pöppelmann GmbH & Co. KG, Lohne,
Order No.: GPN 300 F211
1) These connections do not have protective separation!
2) Accuracy of the temperature measurement:
- KTY: ±7°C (including evaluation)
- PTC: ±5℃ (including evaluation)
3) Connecting cable: Order number 6FX8002-2CA88-xxxx

NOTICE
Damage to motor in the event of incorrectly connected KTY temperature sensor
A KTY temperature sensor connected with incorrect polarity cannot detect if the motor
overheats. Overheating can cause damage to the motor.
• Connect a KTY temperature sensor with the correct polarity.

Control Units and additional system components

302 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.8 Sensor Module External SME20

WARNING
Danger to life due to electric shock in the event of voltage flashovers at the temperature
sensor
Voltage flashovers in the signal electronics can occur in motors without safe electrical
separation of the temperature sensors.
• Use temperature sensors that fully comply with the specifications of the safety isolation.
• If safe electrical separation cannot be guaranteed (for linear motors or third-party
motors, for example), use a Sensor Module External (SME120 or SME125) or Terminal
Module TM120.

8.8.3 Connection example

Figure 8-29 Connection of a direct encoder system via a Sensor Module External (SME)

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 303
Encoder system connection
8.8 Sensor Module External SME20

8.8.4 Dimension drawing

Figure 8-30 Dimension drawing of the Sensor Module External SME20, all data in mm and (inches)

8.8.5 Installation

① Contact surface
Figure 8-31 Drilling pattern for installing the SME20/SME25

Installation
1. Place the drilling pattern on the mounting surface. Make sure that the contact surface is
bare, unpainted metal.
2. Drill two holes with Ø 5.3 or M5 threaded holes according to the drilling pattern.
3. Fix the Sensor Module to the mounting surface. The tightening torque is 6 Nm.

Control Units and additional system components

304 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.8 Sensor Module External SME20

8.8.6 Technical data

Table 8- 29 Technical data

6SL3055-0AA00-5EAx Unit Value

Electronics power supply
Voltage VDC 24 (20,4 … 28,8)
Current (without encoder system) ADC ≤ 0,15
Current (with encoder system) ADC ≤ 0,25
Power loss W ≤4
Encoder system power supply
Voltage VDC 5
Current ADC 0,35
Encoder frequency that can be evaluated kHz ≤ 500
(fencoder)
PE/ground connection At the housing with M4/1.8 Nm screw
Weight kg 0,31
Degree of protection IP67

Note
Current controller clock cycle
For a current controller clock cycle of 31.25 µs, an SME20 with order number 6SL3055-
0AA00-5EA3 must be used.

The maximum cable length for the encoder system interface depends on the current
consumption of the encoder system and the cross-section of the wire in the cable. However,
the maximum length is 10 m. The figure below applies to encoder systems that operate in
the supply voltage range between 4.75 V and 5.25 V. The sample parameters shown are
0.28 mm² cross-section (0.14 mm² supply plus 0.14 mm² Remote Sense wires) and 0.64
mm² (0.5 mm² supply plus 0.14 mm² Remote Sense wires).

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 305
Encoder system connection
8.8 Sensor Module External SME20

Figure 8-32 Max. cable length as a function of the current drawn by the encoder system

In addition to the encoder systems for the supply voltage range of 4.75 V to 5.25 V in the
diagram above, encoder systems are also available for the extended range down to 3.6 V.
These are generally operable using encoder system cables up to 10 m in length, provided
that the total cross-section of the supply plus Remote Sense wires does not fall below 0.14
mm².

Control Units and additional system components

306 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.9 Sensor Module External SME25

8.9 Sensor Module External SME25

8.9.1 Description
Direct encoder systems outside the cabinet can be connected to the Sensor Module External
SME25. The SME25 evaluates these encoder systems and converts the calculated values to
DRIVE-CLiQ.
Direct encoder systems with EnDat 2.1, EnDat 2.2 order designation 02 or SSI with
SIN/COS (1 Vpp) incremental signals can be connected, however without reference signal.
Neither motor nor encoder data are saved in the SME25.

8.9.2 Interface description

8.9.2.1 Overview

Figure 8-33 Interface description SME25

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 307
Encoder system connection
8.9 Sensor Module External SME25

8.9.2.2 DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Table 8- 30 DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) Power supply
B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Connector DRIVE-CLiQ socket
type
Power consumption max. 0.25 A

The blanking cover for the DRIVE-CLiQ port to secure the degree of protection IP 67 is not included in
the scope of delivery.
Blanking covers (6 pcs) order number: 6SL3066-4CA01-0AA0

Note
Only MOTION-CONNECT DRIVE-CLiQ cables may be used for connections. The maximum
cable length is 100 m for MOTION-CONNECT 500, and 75 m for MOTION-CONNECT
800PLUS cables.

Control Units and additional system components

308 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.9 Sensor Module External SME25

8.9.2.3 Encoder system interface

Table 8- 31 Encoder system interface SME25

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 P5 Encoder power supply
2 Reserved, do not use
3 Reserved, do not use
4 M Ground, encoder power supply
5 Reserved, do not use
6 Reserved, do not use
7 P5 Encoder power supply
8 Clock Clock, EnDat interface,
SSI clock
9 Clock* Inverted clock, EnDat interface,
inverted SSI clock
10 M Ground, encoder power supply
11 Housing potential
12 B Incremental signal B
13 B* Inverse incremental signal B
14 Data Data, EnDat interface,
SSI data
15 A Incremental signal A
16 A* Inverse incremental signal A
17 Data* Inverse data, EnDat interface,
Inverse SSI data
Connector kit: 17-pin, order number: 6FX2003-0SA17
Blanking plate for encoder system interface: Pöppelmann GmbH & Co. KG, Lohne,
Order No.: GPN 300 F211

8.9.3 Connection example

Figure 8-34 Connection of a direct encoder system via a Sensor Module External (SME)

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 309
Encoder system connection
8.9 Sensor Module External SME25

8.9.4 Dimension drawing

Figure 8-35 Dimension drawing of the Sensor Module External SME25, all data in mm and (inches)

8.9.5 Installation

① Contact surface
Figure 8-36 Drilling pattern for installing the SME20/SME25

Installation
1. Place the drilling pattern on the mounting surface. Make sure that the contact surface is
bare, unpainted metal.
2. Drill two holes with Ø 5.3 or M5 threaded holes according to the drilling pattern.
3. Fix the Sensor Module to the mounting surface. The tightening torque is 6 Nm.

Control Units and additional system components

310 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.9 Sensor Module External SME25

8.9.6 Technical data

Table 8- 32 Technical data

6SL3055-0AA00-5HAx Unit Value

Electronics power supply
Voltage VDC 24 (20,4 … 28,8)
Current (without encoder system) ADC ≤ 0,15
Current (with encoder system) ADC ≤ 0,25
Power loss W ≤4
Encoder system power supply
Voltage VDC 5
Current ADC 0,35
Encoder frequency that can be evaluated kHz ≤ 500
(fencoder)
SSI/EnDat baud rate kBd 100
PE/ground connection At the housing with M4 screw
Tightening torque: 1.8 Nm
Weight kg 0,31
Degree of protection IP67

Note
Current controller clock cycle
For a current controller clock cycle of 31.25 µs, an SME25 with order number 6SL3055-
0AA00-5HA3 must be used.

The maximum cable length for the encoder system interface depends on the current
consumption of the encoder system and the cross-section of the wire in the cable. However,
the maximum length is 10 m. The figure below applies to encoder systems that operate in
the supply voltage range between 4.75 V and 5.25 V. The sample parameters shown are
0.28 mm² cross-section (0.14 mm² supply plus 0.14 mm² Remote Sense wires) and 0.64
mm² (0.5 mm² supply plus 0.14 mm² Remote Sense wires).

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 311
Encoder system connection
8.9 Sensor Module External SME25

Figure 8-37 Max. cable length as a function of the current drawn by the encoder system

In addition to the encoder systems for the supply voltage range of 4.75 V to 5.25 V in the
diagram above, encoder systems are also available for the extended range down to 3.6 V.
These are generally operable using encoder system cables up to 10 m in length, provided
that the total cross-section of the supply plus Remote Sense wires does not fall below 0.14
mm².

Control Units and additional system components

312 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.10 Sensor Module External SME120

8.10 Sensor Module External SME120

8.10.1 Description
Direct encoder systems outside the cabinet can be connected to the Sensor Module External
SME120. The SME120 evaluates these encoder systems and converts the calculated values
to DRIVE-CLiQ. Neither motor nor encoder data are saved in the SME120. Incremental
direct encoder systems with SIN/COS (1 Vpp) and reference signal can be connected.
An SME120 is always used when the temperature signals of the motors do not have
protective separation or where this separation is not possible for certain reasons.
The SME120 is especially used for linear motor applications. A Hall sensor box can be
connected to determine the commutation position of a linear motor.

8.10.2 Safety instructions for Sensor Modules External

The following safety instructions specifically apply for Sensor Modules External SME12x.

Note
When handling/using a Sensor Module External, you must also observe the safety
instructions for Sensor Modules as well as the safety instructions in Chapter 1 (Page 19).

A Sensor Module External SME12x is a device belonging to safety class I.

WARNING
Rules when handling an SME12x
• It is mandatory that you connect a protective conductor with a minimum cross-section of
2.5 mm2 in order to guarantee safe electrical separation.
• In order to ensure degree of protection IP67, close all connections, even connections
that are not used, with connectors or suitable sealing caps. You must observe the
specified torques.
• Before commissioning, always replace the plastic covers of connections X100 to X500
using the corresponding connectors, as otherwise the Sensor Modules External
SME12x will not conform with degree of protection IP67.
• Under no circumstances open the Sensor Modules, as this can mean that they are no
longer properly sealed! Repair and maintenance work may only be performed by a
SIEMENS service center.
• If it appears that the Sensor Module packaging has been damaged by water, do not
commission the Sensor Module.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 313
Encoder system connection
8.10 Sensor Module External SME120

NOTICE
Damage caused by connecting a grounded encoder system power supply
Only connect those encoder systems where the power supply is not grounded.

8.10.3 Interface description

8.10.3.1 Overview

Figure 8-38 Interface description, SME120

Control Units and additional system components

314 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.10 Sensor Module External SME120

8.10.3.2 X100 encoder system interface

Table 8- 33 X100: Encoder system interface

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 B* Inverse incremental signal B
2 P5 Encoder power supply
3 R Reference signal R
4 R* Inverse reference signal R
5 A Incremental signal A
6 A* Inverse incremental signal A
7 Reserved, do not use
8 B Incremental signal B
9 Reserved, do not use
10 M Ground, encoder power supply
11 M Ground, encoder power supply
12 P5 Encoder power supply
Connector kit: 12-pin, order number: 6FX2003-0SA12
Blanking plate for encoder system interface: Pöppelmann GmbH & Co. KG, Lohne,
Order No.: GPN 300 F211,

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 315
Encoder system connection
8.10 Sensor Module External SME120

8.10.3.3 X200 thermistor sensor input

Table 8- 34 X200: Temperature sensor input

Pin Function Technical data

1 -Temp Temperature sensor connection KTY84-1C130/PTC/bimetallic
2 +Temp switch with NC contact
In linear and torque motor applications, connect the KTY84-
1C130 motor temperature sensor here
3 +Temp Temperature sensor connection KTY84-1C130/PTC/bimetallic
4 -Temp switch with NC contact
In linear and torque motor applications, connect the PTC triple
element 1 or bimetallic switch here
5 +Temp Temperature sensor connection KTY84-1C130/PTC/bimetallic
6 -Temp switch with NC contact
In torque motor applications, connect the PTC triple element 2
here
Connector kit: 6+1 pin, order number: 6FX2003-0SU07
Measuring current via temperature sensor connection: 2 mA
Accuracy with the temperature measurement:
- KTY: ±7°C (including evaluation)
- PTC: ±5℃ (including evaluation)

NOTICE
Overheating of the motor through jumpering the temperature sensor connections
Jumpering of the temperature sensor connections "+ Temp" and "- Temp" results in
incorrect measurement results. Damage to the motor can result if the overheating is not
detected.
• When using several temperature sensors, separately connect the individual sensors to
"+ Temp" and "- Temp".

Control Units and additional system components

316 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.10 Sensor Module External SME120

8.10.3.4 X300 hall sensor input

Table 8- 35 X300: Hall sensor input

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 C Absolute track signal C
2 C* Inverse absolute track signal C
3 P5 Encoder power supply
4 M Ground, encoder power supply
5 D Absolute track signal D
6 D* Inverse absolute track signal D
7 Not assigned
8 Not assigned
9 Ground Ground (for internal shield)

8.10.3.5 X500 DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Table 8- 36 X500: DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) Power supply
B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Connector DRIVE-CLiQ socket
type
Power consumption max. 0.30 A

The blanking cover for the DRIVE-CLiQ port to secure the degree of protection IP 67 is not included in
the scope of delivery.
Blanking covers (6 pcs) order number: 6SL3066-4CA01-0AA0

Note
Only MOTION-CONNECT DRIVE-CLiQ cables may be used for connections. The maximum
cable length is 100 m for MOTION-CONNECT 500, and 75 m for MOTION-CONNECT
800PLUS cables.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 317
Encoder system connection
8.10 Sensor Module External SME120

8.10.4 Connection examples

Figure 8-39 Connecting motor encoders via SME for motors without a DRIVE-CLiQ interface and molded connecting
cables with terminated cable ends

Control Units and additional system components

318 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.10 Sensor Module External SME120

Figure 8-40 Connecting motor encoders via SME for motors without a DRIVE-CLiQ interface and molded connecting
cables with open cable ends

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 319
Encoder system connection
8.10 Sensor Module External SME120

Figure 8-41 Connecting motor encoders via SME for motors without a DRIVE-CLiQ interface, with an integrated 2-hole
terminal box

Control Units and additional system components

320 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.10 Sensor Module External SME120

Connection examples for motors connected in parallel

Figure 8-42 Connecting motor encoders via SME for torque motors connected in parallel without a DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 321
Encoder system connection
8.10 Sensor Module External SME120

Figure 8-43 Connecting motor encoders via SME for linear motors connected in parallel without a DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Control Units and additional system components

322 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.10 Sensor Module External SME120

8.10.5 Dimension drawing

Figure 8-44 Dimension drawing of the Sensor Module External SME120, all data in mm and (inches)

8.10.6 Installation

① Contact surface

Figure 8-45 Hole drilling pattern for installation

Installation
1. Place the drilling pattern on the mounting surface. Make sure that the contact surface is
bare, unpainted metal.
2. Drill two holes with Ø 5.3 or M5 threaded holes according to the drilling pattern.
3. Fix the Sensor Module to the mounting surface. The tightening torque is 6 Nm.

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 323
Encoder system connection
8.10 Sensor Module External SME120

8.10.7 Technical data

Table 8- 37 Technical data

6SL3055-0AA00-5JAx Unit Value

Electronics power supply
Voltage VDC 24 (20,4 … 28,8)
Current (without encoder system) ADC ≤ 0,20
Current (with encoder system) ADC ≤ 0,30
Power loss W ≤ 4,5
Encoder system power supply
Voltage VDC 5
Current ADC 0,35
Encoder frequency that can be evaluated kHz ≤ 500
(fencoder)
PE/ground connection At the housing with M4/1.8 Nm screw
Weight kg 0,7
Degree of protection IP67

Note
Current controller clock cycle
For a current controller clock cycle of 31.25 µs, an SME120 with order number 6SL3055-
0AA00-5JA3 must be used.

Note
In order to guarantee the degree of protection, all of the plug connectors must be correctly
screwed into place and appropriately locked.

The maximum cable length for the encoder system interface depends on the current
consumption of the encoder system and the cross-section of the wire in the cable. However,
the maximum length is 10 m. The figure below applies to encoder systems that operate in
the supply voltage range between 4.75 V and 5.25 V. The sample parameters shown are
0.28 mm² cross-section (0.14 mm² supply plus 0.14 mm² Remote Sense wires) and 0.64
mm² (0.5 mm² supply plus 0.14 mm² Remote Sense wires).

Control Units and additional system components

324 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.10 Sensor Module External SME120

Figure 8-46 Max. cable length as a function of the current drawn by the encoder system

In addition to the encoder systems for the supply voltage range of 4.75 V to 5.25 V in the
diagram above, encoder systems are also available for the extended range down to 3.6 V.
These are generally operable using encoder system cables up to 10 m in length, provided
that the total cross-section of the supply plus Remote Sense wires does not fall below 0.14
mm².

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 325
Encoder system connection
8.11 Sensor Module External SME125

8.11 Sensor Module External SME125

8.11.1 Description
Direct encoder systems outside the cabinet can be connected to the Sensor Module External
SME125. The SME125 evaluates these encoder systems and converts the calculated values
to DRIVE-CLiQ.
The components are always used when the temperature signals of the motors do not have
protective separation or where this separation is not possible for certain reasons. SME125 is
mainly used in linear motor applications.
Direct encoder systems with EnDat 2.1, EnDat 2.2 order designation 02 or SSI with
SIN/COS (1 Vpp) incremental signals can be connected, however without reference signal.
Neither motor nor encoder data are saved in the SME125.

8.11.2 Safety instructions for Sensor Modules External

The following safety instructions specifically apply for Sensor Modules External SME12x.

Note
When handling/using a Sensor Module External, you must also observe the safety
instructions for Sensor Modules as well as the safety instructions in Chapter 1 (Page 19).

A Sensor Module External SME12x is a device belonging to safety class I.

WARNING
Rules when handling an SME12x
• It is mandatory that you connect a protective conductor with a minimum cross-section of
2.5 mm2 in order to guarantee safe electrical separation.
• In order to ensure degree of protection IP67, close all connections, even connections
that are not used, with connectors or suitable sealing caps. You must observe the
specified torques.
• Before commissioning, always replace the plastic covers of connections X100 to X500
using the corresponding connectors, as otherwise the Sensor Modules External
SME12x will not conform with degree of protection IP67.
• Under no circumstances open the Sensor Modules, as this can mean that they are no
longer properly sealed! Repair and maintenance work may only be performed by a
SIEMENS service center.
• If it appears that the Sensor Module packaging has been damaged by water, do not
commission the Sensor Module.

Control Units and additional system components

326 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.11 Sensor Module External SME125

NOTICE
Damage caused by connecting a grounded encoder system power supply
Only connect those encoder systems where the power supply is not grounded.

8.11.3 Interface description

8.11.3.1 Overview

Figure 8-47 Interface description, SME125

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 327
Encoder system connection
8.11 Sensor Module External SME125

8.11.3.2 X100 encoder system interface

Table 8- 38 X100: Encoder system interface

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 P5 Encoder power supply
2 Reserved, do not use
3 Reserved, do not use
4 M Ground, encoder power supply
5 Reserved, do not use
6 Reserved, do not use
7 P5 Encoder power supply
8 Clock Clock, EnDat interface, SSI clock
9 Clock* Inverted clock, EnDat interface,
inverted SSI clock
10 M Ground, encoder power supply
11 Housing potential
12 B Incremental signal B
13 B* Inverse incremental signal B
14 Data Data, EnDat interface, SSI data
15 A Incremental signal A
16 A* Inverse incremental signal A
17 Data* Inverse data, EnDat interface,
Inverse SSI data
Connector kit: 17-pin, order number: 6FX2003-0SA17
Blanking plate for encoder system interface: Pöppelmann GmbH & Co. KG, Lohne,
Order No.: GPN 300 F211

Control Units and additional system components

328 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.11 Sensor Module External SME125

8.11.3.3 X200 thermistor sensor input

Table 8- 39 X200: Temperature sensor input

Pin Function Technical data

1 -Temp Temperature sensor connection KTY84-1C130/PTC/bimetallic
2 +Temp switch with NC contact
In linear and torque motor applications, connect the KTY84-
1C130 motor temperature sensor here
3 +Temp Temperature sensor connection KTY84-1C130/PTC/bimetallic
4 -Temp switch with NC contact
In linear and torque motor applications, connect the PTC triple
element 1 or bimetallic switch here
5 +Temp Temperature sensor connection KTY84-1C130/PTC/bimetallic
6 -Temp switch with NC contact
In torque motor applications, connect the PTC triple element 2
here
Connector kit: 6+1 pin, order number: 6FX2003-0SU07
Measuring current via temperature sensor connection: 2 mA
Accuracy with the temperature measurement:
- KTY: ±7°C (including evaluation)
- PTC: ±5℃ (including evaluation)

NOTICE
Overheating of the motor through jumpering the temperature sensor connections
Jumpering of the temperature sensor connections "+ Temp" and "- Temp" results in
incorrect measurement results. Damage to the motor can result if the overheating is not
detected.
• When using several temperature sensors, separately connect the individual sensors to
"+ Temp" and "- Temp".

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 329
Encoder system connection
8.11 Sensor Module External SME125

8.11.3.4 X500 DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Table 8- 40 X500: DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) Power supply
B M (0 V) Electronics ground
Connector DRIVE-CLiQ socket
type
Power consumption max. 0.30 A

The blanking cover for the DRIVE-CLiQ port to secure the degree of protection IP 67 is not included in
the scope of delivery.
Blanking covers (6 pcs) order number: 6SL3066-4CA01-0AA0

Note
Only MOTION-CONNECT DRIVE-CLiQ cables may be used for connections. The maximum
cable length is 100 m for MOTION-CONNECT 500, and 75 m for MOTION-CONNECT
800PLUS cables.

Control Units and additional system components

330 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.11 Sensor Module External SME125

8.11.4 Connection examples

Figure 8-48 Connecting motor encoders via SME for motors without a DRIVE-CLiQ interface and molded connecting
cables with terminated cable ends

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 331
Encoder system connection
8.11 Sensor Module External SME125

Figure 8-49 Connecting motor encoders via SME for motors without a DRIVE-CLiQ interface and molded connecting
cables with open cable ends

Control Units and additional system components

332 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.11 Sensor Module External SME125

Figure 8-50 Connecting motor encoders via SME for motors without a DRIVE-CLiQ interface, with an integrated 2-hole
terminal box

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 333
Encoder system connection
8.11 Sensor Module External SME125

Connection examples for motors connected in parallel

Figure 8-51 Connecting motor encoders via SME for torque motors connected in parallel without a DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Control Units and additional system components

334 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.11 Sensor Module External SME125

Figure 8-52 Connecting motor encoders via SME for linear motors connected in parallel without a DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 335
Encoder system connection
8.11 Sensor Module External SME125

8.11.5 Dimension drawing

Figure 8-53 Dimension drawing of the Sensor Module External SME125, all data in mm and (inches)

8.11.6 Installation

① Contact surface

Figure 8-54 Hole drilling pattern for installation

Installation
1. Place the drilling pattern on the mounting surface. Make sure that the contact surface is
bare, unpainted metal.
2. Drill two holes with Ø 5.3 or M5 threaded holes according to the drilling pattern.
3. Fix the Sensor Module to the mounting surface. The tightening torque is 6 Nm.

Control Units and additional system components

336 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.11 Sensor Module External SME125

8.11.7 Technical data

Table 8- 41 Technical data

6SL3055-0AA00-5KAx Unit Value

Electronics power supply
Voltage VDC 24 (20,4 … 28,8)
Current (without encoder system) ADC ≤ 0,20
Current (with encoder system) ADC ≤ 0,30
Power loss W ≤ 4,5
Encoder system power supply
Voltage VDC 5
Current ADC 0,35
Encoder frequency that can be evaluated kHz ≤ 500
(fencoder)
SSI/EnDat baud rate kBd 100
PE/ground connection At the housing with M4 screw
Tightening torque: 1.8 Nm
Weight kg 0,7
Degree of protection IP67

Note
Current controller clock cycle
For a current controller clock cycle of 31.25 µs, an SME125 with order number 6SL3055-
0AA00-5KA3 must be used.

Note
In order to guarantee the degree of protection, all of the plug connectors must be correctly
screwed into place and appropriately locked.

The maximum cable length for the encoder system interface depends on the current
consumption of the encoder system and the cross-section of the wire in the cable. However,
the maximum length is 10 m. The figure below applies to encoder systems that operate in
the supply voltage range between 4.75 V and 5.25 V. The sample parameters shown are
0.28 mm² cross-section (0.14 mm² supply plus 0.14 mm² Remote Sense wires) and 0.64
mm² (0.5 mm² supply plus 0.14 mm² Remote Sense wires).

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 337
Encoder system connection
8.11 Sensor Module External SME125

Figure 8-55 Max. cable length as a function of the current drawn by the encoder system

In addition to the encoder systems for the supply voltage range of 4.75 V to 5.25 V in the
diagram above, encoder systems are also available for the extended range down to 3.6 V.
These are generally operable using encoder system cables up to 10 m in length, provided
that the total cross-section of the supply plus Remote Sense wires does not fall below 0.14
mm².

Control Units and additional system components

338 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.12 DRIVE-CLiQ encoder

8.12 DRIVE-CLiQ encoder

8.12.1 Description
The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder is available as an absolute encoder with integrated DRIVE-CLiQ
interface. The multiturn design of the encoder senses absolute position values extending
over 4096 revolutions. The singleturn design senses the absolute position within a
revolution.
The most important advantages are:
● Automatic commissioning via DRIVE-CLiQ
● High operating temperatures of 100 °C are possible
● Integrated diagnostics concept

Table 8- 42 Encoder for mounting with DRIVE-CLiQ

Designation Order number Description

DRIVE-CLiQ synchronous flange VW 6 mm 6FX2001-5FD13-0AAx Absolute encoder with DRIVE-CLiQ, single-turn
DRIVE-CLiQ clamping flange VW 10 mm 6FX2001-5QD13-0AAx Absolute encoder with DRIVE-CLiQ, single-turn
DRIVE-CLiQ hollow shaft 10 mm 6FX2001-5VD13-0AAx Absolute encoder with DRIVE-CLiQ, single-turn
DRIVE-CLiQ hollow shaft 12 mm 6FX2001-5WD13-0AAx Absolute encoder with DRIVE-CLiQ, single-turn
DRIVE-CLiQ synchronous flange VW 6 mm 6FX2001-5FD25-0AAx Absolute encoder with DRIVE-CLiQ, multiturn
DRIVE-CLiQ clamping flange VW 10 mm 6FX2001-5QD25-0AAx Absolute encoder with DRIVE-CLiQ, multiturn
DRIVE-CLiQ hollow shaft 10 mm 6FX2001-5VD25-0AAx Absolute encoder with DRIVE-CLiQ, multiturn
DRIVE-CLiQ hollow shaft 12 mm 6FX2001-5WD25-0AAx Absolute encoder with DRIVE-CLiQ, multiturn

8.12.2 Interface description

8.12.2.1 Overview

Figure 8-56 DRIVE-CLiQ encoder

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 339
Encoder system connection
8.12 DRIVE-CLiQ encoder

8.12.2.2 DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Table 8- 43 DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Pin Signal name Technical data

1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A Reserved, do not use
B M (0 V) Electronics ground

The blanking cover for the DRIVE-CLiQ port to secure the degree of protection IP 67 is not included in
the scope of delivery.
Blanking covers (6 pcs) order number: 6SL3066-4CA01-0AA0

8.12.3 Dimension drawings

Figure 8-57 Dimension drawing of synchronous flange, all data in mm and (inches)

Control Units and additional system components

340 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.12 DRIVE-CLiQ encoder

Figure 8-58 Dimension drawing of clamping flange, all data in mm and (inches)

Figure 8-59 Dimension drawing of hollow shaft, all data in mm and (inches)

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 341
Encoder system connection
8.12 DRIVE-CLiQ encoder

Table 8- 44 Dimensions

Dimensions Unit
Hollow shaft ØA 10+0.012 (0.39) 12+0.012 (0.47) mm (inch)
Connection shafts ØC 10 (0.39) 12 (0.47) mm (inch)
Clamping ring ØB 18 (0.70) 20 (0.78) mm (inch)
L min. 15 (0.59) 18 (0.70) mm (inch)
L max. 20 (0.78) 20 (0.78) mm (inch)
Shaft code 2 (0.07) 7 (0.27) mm (inch)

L = Engaged depth of the connection shaft into the encoder

8.12.4 Installation

Figure 8-60 Installation: Synchronous flange, 1: Clamp straps

Control Units and additional system components

342 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.12 DRIVE-CLiQ encoder

Clamp straps / couplings

Clamp straps and couplings are required as mounting accessories. The clamp straps are
used to fix the encoders with a synchronous flange.

Table 8- 45 Selection and ordering data

Designation Order No.

Clamp strap (No.1 in the drawing) 6FX2001-7KP01
for encoder with synchronous flange
(3 units are required)
Spring disk coupling
Shaft diameter:
• 6 mm / 6 mm 6FX2001-7KF10
6FX2001-7KF06
• 6 mm / 5 mm
Plug-in coupling
Shaft diameter:
• 6 mm / 6 mm 6FX2001-7KS06
6FX2001-7KS10
• 10 mm / 10 mm

Table 8- 46 Installation instructions

Product name Spring disk coupling Plug-in coupling

Transmission torque, max. 0.8 Nm 0.7 Nm
Shaft diameter 6 mm both ends or 6 mm both ends or
d1 = 6 mm, d2 = 5 mm 10 mm both ends
Center offset of shafts, max. 0.4 mm 0.5 mm
Axial offset ± 0.4 mm ± 0.5 mm
Angular displacement of shafts, max. 3° 1°
Torsional rigidity 150 Nm / rad 31 Nm / rad
Lateral spring stiffness 6 N / mm 10 N / mm
Moment of inertia 19 gcm2 20 gcm2
Max. speed 12000 rpm 12000 rpm
Operating temperature -20 ... +150 °C -20 ... +80 °C
Weight, approx. 16 g 20 g

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 343
Encoder system connection
8.12 DRIVE-CLiQ encoder

Figure 8-61 Installation: Hollow shaft, A: Spring plate (included in scope of supply)

Control Units and additional system components

344 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Encoder system connection
8.12 DRIVE-CLiQ encoder

8.12.5 Technical data

Table 8- 47 Technical data of DRIVE-CLiQ encoders

Design Unit Absolute encoder with DRIVE-CLiQ

Operating voltage at encoder V 24 V -15% / +20%
Power consumption
Single-turn mA approx. 245
Multiturn mA approx. 325
Interface DRIVE-CLiQ
Speed
electrically permissible rpm 14000
mechanical, max. rpm 10000
Cable length, max. m 100
Connection DRIVE-CLiQ connector, radial
Resolution
Single-turn Bit 22
Multiturn Bit 34 (22 bit single-turn + 12 bit multiturn)
Accuracy Angular ±35
seconds
Frictional torque Nm ≤ 0.01 (at 20°C)
Starting torque Nm ≤ 0.01 (at 20°C)
Shaft load capability d 10 x 19.5 70°
n > 6000 rpm axial 40 N / radial 40 N at the shaft end
n ≤ 6000 rpm axial 40 N / radial 60 N at the shaft end
Angular acceleration, , max. rad/s2 105
Moment of inertia of the rotor
Solid shaft kgm2 1.90 * 10-6 kgm2
Hollow shaft kgm2 2.80 * 10-6 kgm2
Vibration loading m/s2 ≤ 100 (10 - 500 Hz)
acc. to IEC 60068-2-6
Shock (6 ms) acc. to IEC 60068-2-27 m/s2 ≤ 1000 (6 ms)
Operating temperature
min. °C -20
max. °C 100
Degree of protection acc. to IEC 60529 IP67 at the frame
IP64 at the shaft input
Weight
Single-turn kg 0,40
Multiturn kg 0,44
CE mark Yes

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 345
Encoder system connection
8.12 DRIVE-CLiQ encoder

Control Units and additional system components

346 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
Cabinet design and electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC) 9
9.1 Tightening torques for screws and screw connections
For screws and screw connections of components that are described in this manual, the
following tightening torques apply:

Table 9- 1 Tightening torques for ground connections, protective conductor screw connections and
control cabinet installation

Thread Tightening torque in Nm

M3 0.8 Nm
M4 1.8 Nm
M5 3.0 Nm
M6 6.0 Nm
M8 13.0 Nm
M10 25.0 Nm

Tolerance ––> 0 to +30 %

Deviating tightening torques

For screw terminals on components and for mounting individual components in the control
cabinet, the following deviating tightening torques apply. The corresponding data are
described in the following chapters:
● Installation for SME20 (Page 304), SME25 (Page 310), SME120 (Page 323) and
SME125 (Page 336)
● Screw terminals (Page 360)

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 347
Cabinet design and electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
9.2 Information on control cabinet installation and EMC

9.2 Information on control cabinet installation and EMC

Information on control cabinet installation and electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), as well
as on overcurrent and overvoltage protection, can be found in the following manuals:
● Components in the booksize format:
SINAMICS S120 Manual for Booksize Power Units (GH2)
● Components in the blocksize format:
SINAMICS S120 Manual AC Drive (GH6)
● Components in the chassis format:
SINAMICS S120 Manual Chassis Power Units (GH3), SINAMICS S120 Manual Chassis
Units Liquid-Cooled (GH7)
The requirements to implement EMC are listed in the Configuration Manual "EMC installation
guideline" (Order number 6FC5297-0AD30-0xPx).

Control Units and additional system components

348 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
Appendix A
A.1 List of abbreviations

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 349
Appendix
A.1 List of abbreviations

Control Units and additional system components

350 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Appendix
A.1 List of abbreviations

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 351
Appendix
A.1 List of abbreviations

Control Units and additional system components

352 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Appendix
A.1 List of abbreviations

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 353
Appendix
A.1 List of abbreviations

Control Units and additional system components

354 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Appendix
A.1 List of abbreviations

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 355
Appendix
A.1 List of abbreviations

Control Units and additional system components

356 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Appendix
A.1 List of abbreviations

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 357
Appendix
A.2 Documentation overview

A.2 Documentation overview

Control Units and additional system components

358 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Appendix
A.3 Terminal description

A.3 Terminal description

A.3.1 Spring-loaded terminals

The type of spring-loaded terminal can be taken from the interface description of the
particular component.

Table A- 1 Connectable conductor cross-sections for spring-loaded terminals

Spring-loaded terminal type

1 Connectable cable cross- Rigid 0.14 … 0.5 mm2
sections Flexible 0.14 … 0.5 mm2
Flexible with end sleeve without plastic sleeve 0.25 … 0.5 mm2
AWG/kcmil 26 … 20
Stripped length 8 mm
2 Connectable cable cross- Flexible 0.08 … 2.5 mm2
sections
Stripped length 8 … 9 mm
3 Connectable cable cross- Rigid 0.2 … 1.5 mm2
sections Flexible 0.2 … 1.5 mm2
Flexible with end sleeve without plastic sleeve 0.25 … 1.5 mm2
Flexible with end sleeve with plastic sleeve 0.25 … 0.75 mm2
AWG/kcmil 24 … 16
Stripped length 10 mm
4 Connectable cable cross- 25 … 95 mm2
sections AWG 4 … 4/0
Stripped length 35 mm
5 Connectable cable cross- Rigid 0.2 … 10 mm2
sections Flexible 0.2 … 6 mm2
Flexible with end sleeve without plastic sleeve 0.25 … 6 mm2
Flexible with end sleeve with plastic sleeve 0.25 … 4 mm2
AWG/kcmil 24 … 8
Stripped length 15 mm

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 359
Appendix
A.3 Terminal description

A.3.2 Screw terminals

The type of screw terminal can be taken from the interface description of the particular
component.

Table A- 2 Connectable conductor cross-sections and tightening torques for screw terminals

Screw terminal type

1 Connectable cable cross- Rigid, flexible 0.08 … 1.5 mm2
sections With end sleeve, without plastic sleeve 0.25 … 1.5 mm2
With end sleeve, with plastic sleeve 0.25 … 0.5 mm2
Stripped length 7 mm
Tool Screwdriver 0.4 x 2.0 mm
Tightening torque 0.22 … 0.25 Nm
1_1 Connectable cable cross- Rigid, flexible 0.14 … 1.5 mm2
sections With end sleeve, without plastic sleeve 0.25 … 1.5 mm2
With end sleeve, with plastic sleeve 0.25 … 0.5 mm2
Stripped length 7 mm
Tool Screwdriver 0.4 x 2.5 mm
Tightening torque 0.22 … 0.25 Nm
2 Connectable cable cross- Rigid, flexible 0.2 … 2.5 mm2
sections With end sleeve, without plastic sleeve 0.2 … 2.5 mm2
With end sleeve, with plastic sleeve 0.2 … 1.5 mm2
AWG / kcmil 22 … 12
Stripped length 6 … 7 mm
Tool Screwdriver 0.5 x 3 mm
Tightening torque 0.4 … 0.5 Nm
3 Connectable cable cross- Flexible 0.2 … 2.5 mm2
sections With end sleeve, without plastic sleeve 0.25 … 1 mm2
With end sleeve, with plastic sleeve 0.25 … 1 mm2
Stripped length 9 mm
Tool Screwdriver 0.6 x 3.5 mm
Tightening torque 0.5 … 0.6 Nm
4 Connectable cable cross- Flexible 0.2 … 4 mm2
sections With end sleeve, without plastic sleeve 0.25 … 4 mm2
With end sleeve, with plastic sleeve 0.25 … 4 mm2
Stripped length 7 mm
Tool Screwdriver 0.6 x 3.5 mm
Tightening torque 0.5 … 0.6 Nm
5 Connectable cable cross- Flexible 0.5 … 6 mm2
sections With end sleeve, without plastic sleeve 0.5 … 6 mm2
With end sleeve, with plastic sleeve 0.5 … 6 mm2
Stripped length 12 mm
Tool Screwdriver 1.0 x 4.0 mm
Tightening torque 1.2 … 1.5 Nm

Control Units and additional system components

360 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Appendix
A.3 Terminal description

Screw terminal type

6 Connectable cable cross- Flexible 0.5 … 10 mm2
sections With end sleeve, without plastic sleeve 0.5 … 10 mm2
With end sleeve, with plastic sleeve 0.5 … 10 mm2
Stripped length 11 mm
Tool Screwdriver 1.0 x 4.0 mm
Tightening torque 1.5 … 1.8 Nm
7 Connectable cable cross- 0.5 … 16 mm2
sections
Stripped length 14 mm
Tool Screwdriver 1.0 x 4.0 mm
Tightening torque 1.5 … 1.7 Nm

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 361
Appendix
A.3 Terminal description

Control Units and additional system components

362 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
Index

LEDs during booting, 82

Control Unit CU320-2 PN, 43
A LEDs after booting, 61
LEDs during booting, 60
Address
Setting the PROFIBUS address, 76
Ambient temperature, 35
D
Diagnostics via LEDs
B CAN CBC10 Communication Board, 101
CBE20 Ethernet Communication Board, 105
Basic Operator Panel BOP20, 91
Communication Board Ethernet CBE25, 111
Control Unit CU320-2 DP, 83
Control Unit CU320-2 PN, 61
C
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20, 218
CAN CBC10 Communication Board, 98 Sensor Module Cabinet SMC10, 259
CBE20 Ethernet Communication Board, 103 Sensor Module Cabinet SMC20, 268
Communication Board Ethernet CBE25, 108 Sensor Module Cabinet SMC30, 281
Components Sensor Module Cabinet SMC40, 296
Basic Operator Panel BOP20, 91 Terminal Module TM120, 196
CAN CBC10 Communication Board, 98 Terminal Module TM15, 131
CBE20 Ethernet Communication Board, 103 Terminal Module TM150, 208
Communication Board Ethernet CBE25, 108 Terminal Module TM31, 150
Control Unit CU320-2 DP, 65 Terminal Module TM41, 164
Control Unit CU320-2 PN, 43 Terminal Module TM54F, 182
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder, 339 Voltage Sensing Module VSM10, 242
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20, 214 Dimension drawings
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External DME20, 222 Control Unit CU320-2 DP, 85
Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10, 255 Control Unit CU320-2 PN, 63
Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC20, 264 DRIVE-CLiQ encoder, 340
Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30, 272 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20, 219
Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC40, 290 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External DME20, 226
Sensor Module External SME120, 313 Sensor Module Cabinet SMC10, 260
Sensor Module External SME125, 326 Sensor Module Cabinet SMC20, 269
Sensor Module External SME20, 300 Sensor Module Cabinet SMC30, 282
Sensor Module External SME25, 307 Sensor Module Cabinet SMC40, 297
Terminal Board TB30, 115 Sensor Module External SME120, 323
Terminal Module TM120, 188 Sensor Module External SME125, 336
Terminal Module TM15, 125 Sensor Module External SME20, 304
Terminal Module TM150, 201 Sensor Module External SME25, 310
Terminal Module TM31, 138 Terminal Module TM120, 197
Terminal Module TM41, 156 Terminal Module TM15, 132
Terminal Module TM54F, 169 Terminal Module TM150, 209
Voltage Sensing Module, 229 Terminal Module TM31, 151
Connector coding Terminal Module TM41, 165
Terminal Module TM15, 135 Terminal Module TM54F, 184
Terminal Module TM31, 154 Voltage Sensing Module VSM10, 243
Control Unit CU320-2 DP, 65 DRIVE-CLiQ encoder, 339
LEDs after booting, 83 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20, 214

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 363
Index

DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External DME20, 222 Terminal Module TM15, 126
Introduction, 30

F
L
Field of application, 27
LEDs
CAN CBC10 Communication Board, 101
I CBE20 Ethernet Communication Board, 105
Communication Board Ethernet CBE25, 111
Installation
Control Unit CU320-2 DP, 83
Basic Operator Panel BOP20, 94
Control Unit CU320-2 PN, 61
CBE20 Ethernet Communication Board, 107
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20, 218
Communication Board CBC10, 102
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC10, 259
Communication Board Ethernet CBE25, 113
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC20, 268
Control Unit CU320-2 DP/PN, 87
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC30, 281
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder, 342
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC40, 296
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20, 220
Terminal Module TM120, 196
Sensor Module Cabinet, 261, 270, 283
Terminal Module TM15, 131
Sensor Module External SME120, 323
Terminal Module TM150, 208
Sensor Module External SME125, 336
Terminal Module TM31, 150
Sensor Module External SME20/SME25, 304, 310
Terminal Module TM41, 164
Sensor Modules Cabinet SMC40, 298
Terminal Module TM54F, 182
Terminal Board TB30, 120
Voltage Sensing Module VSM10, 242
Terminal Module TM120, 198
Terminal Module TM150, 210
Terminal Modules, 133, 152, 166, 185
P
Voltage Sensing Module VSM10, 244
Interface descriptions Platform Concept, 28
Basic Operator Panel BOP20, 91 PROFIBUS
CAN CBC10 Communication Board, 98 Setting the address, 76
CBE20 Ethernet Communication Board, 103 Protective conductor connection and shield support
Communication Board Ethernet CBE25, 109 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20, 221
Control Unit CU320-2 DP, 66 Terminal Module TM120, 199
Control Unit CU320-2 PN, 44 Terminal Module TM15, 134
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20, 215 Terminal Module TM150, 211
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External DME20, 223 Terminal Module TM31, 153
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC10, 255 Terminal Module TM41, 167
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC20, 264 Terminal Module TM54F, 186
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC30, 272 Voltage Sensing Module VSM10, 245
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC40, 291
Sensor Module External SME120, 314
Sensor Module External SME125, 327 S
Sensor Module External SME20, 300
Safety instructions
Sensor Module External SME25, 307
Control Units, 41
Terminal Board TB30, 115
Hub Modules, 213
Terminal Module TM120, 189
Option boards, 97
Terminal Module TM150, 202
Sensor Module External, 313, 326
Terminal Module TM31, 139
Sensor Modules and encoders, 252
Terminal Module TM41, 157
Terminal Modules, 123
Terminal Module TM54F, 170
Voltage Sensing Modules VSM10, 230
Voltage Sensing Module VSM10, 232
Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC10, 255
Interface Descriptions
Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC20, 264

Control Units and additional system components

364 Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4
 Index

Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30, 272 V

Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC40, 290
Voltage Sensing Module, 229
Sensor Module External SME120, 313
Sensor Module External SME125, 326
Sensor Module External SME20, 300
Sensor Module External SME25, 307
Sensor Modules
Overview, 250
Specification of encoder systems and encoders
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC30, 286
Storage, 35
Switches for PROFIBUS address, 76

T
Technical data
CAN CBC10 Communication Board, 102
Control Unit CU320-2 DP, 86
Control Unit CU320-2 PN, 64
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder, 345
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module DMC20, 221
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External DME20, 227
Electronics power supply, 34
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC10, 262
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC20, 271
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC30, 285
Sensor Module Cabinet SMC40, 299
Sensor Module External SME120, 324
Sensor Module External SME125, 337
Sensor Module External SME20, 305
Sensor Module External SME25, 311
Terminal Board TB30, 121
Terminal Module TM120, 200
Terminal Module TM15, 136
Terminal Module TM150, 212
Terminal Module TM31, 155
Terminal Module TM41, 168
Terminal Module TM54F, 187
Voltage Sensing Module VSM10, 246
Terminal Board TB30, 115
Terminal Module TM120, 188
Terminal Module TM15, 125
Terminal Module TM150, 201
Terminal Module TM31, 138
Terminal Module TM41, 156
Terminal Module TM54F, 169
Tightening torques, 347
Totally Integrated Automation, 28
Transport, 35

Control Units and additional system components

Manual, (GH1), 04/2014, 6SL3097-4AH00-0BP4 365